<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Linkee14</id>
		<title>Help Wiki - User contributions [en]</title>
		<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Linkee14"/>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/Special:Contributions/Linkee14"/>
		<updated>2026-06-15T14:23:38Z</updated>
		<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
		<generator>MediaWiki 1.26.3</generator>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Medium_Format_Cameras_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=36389</id>
		<title>Medium Format Cameras Gear Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Medium_Format_Cameras_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=36389"/>
				<updated>2018-01-19T02:51:51Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Linkee14: /* Exposing, Focusing, &amp;amp; Taking a Picture */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:MediumFormat-top-large.jpg|centre|800x800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
'''A proficiency test is required to check out these cameras.''' Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide and complete the written portion of the [[Medium Format Cameras Proficiency Test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. (You must already be proficient in the 35mm manual camera before obtaining this proficiency.) Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Introduction to Medium Format ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Medium Format vs. 35mm ====&lt;br /&gt;
This is an instructional guide to the medium format film&lt;br /&gt;
cameras available at Media Loan. It will cover a brief introduction to medium&lt;br /&gt;
format photography and then go through the operating steps for each of our&lt;br /&gt;
models. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When talking about film photography, there are three main&lt;br /&gt;
types of film, or formats: 35mm, medium format, and large format. With medium&lt;br /&gt;
and large format, the frame size on the film is much larger than 35mm film and yields significantly more detail and the ability to be printed at very large sizes. In essence, it&lt;br /&gt;
is a question of quality. The size and shape of the actual frame is variable&lt;br /&gt;
depending on the camera (whether your picture is a square, rectangle, skinny&lt;br /&gt;
rectangle, etc.) The size of the frame is often indicated in the name of the&lt;br /&gt;
camera, like the Pentax 6x7 whose frame dimensions are 6cm by 7cm. With 35mm&lt;br /&gt;
photography the size of the frame is always 35mm across regardless of the&lt;br /&gt;
camera used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Medium format film comes wrapped around a plastic spool with&lt;br /&gt;
light-safe black paper layered around the film itself. There is no metal&lt;br /&gt;
canister like with 35mm film. Additionally, when there are no more exposures&lt;br /&gt;
left on the roll, medium format film is not rewound back on to the spool but is&lt;br /&gt;
transferred to another take-up spool on the other side of the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of medium format film, 120 and 220. The&lt;br /&gt;
film is exactly the same except that 220 film contains twice the amount of&lt;br /&gt;
exposures as 120. However, most medium format cameras can shoot only one or the&lt;br /&gt;
other. The Pentax 6x7 and the Mamiya cameras have the ability to shoot both but the camera needs to be adjusted&lt;br /&gt;
to the right setting prior to loading the film. 120 film is the most common and&lt;br /&gt;
allows for 10-12 exposures depending on the camera’s aspect ratio. Keep in mind that not all photo labs can process 220 film.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Tools Required ====&lt;br /&gt;
In order to shoot on a medium format camera, you will need some&lt;br /&gt;
accessories. Some are optional while others are not. The essentials include an&lt;br /&gt;
'''empty film spool''' that your exposed film will be transferred on to (there should&lt;br /&gt;
already be one in the camera from the previous user. If there isn’t ask a Media&lt;br /&gt;
Loan staff member to give you one.) You will also need a '''light meter''' as most of our medium&lt;br /&gt;
format cameras do not have built in meters.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Refer&lt;br /&gt;
to [http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/Light_Meters_Quick_Guide Media Loan’s operating guide for light meters] to find out how to use what&lt;br /&gt;
might be called your medium format camera’s best friend.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other accessories include tripods, cable releases, and&lt;br /&gt;
flashes. If using a flash, remember to also pick up a flash sync cable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Precautions ====&lt;br /&gt;
These cameras are old, expensive, and used by many students. Please give them the respect they deserve. Before handling a camera, be&lt;br /&gt;
aware of what can potentially damage it and what improper usage looks like. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some general rules for these cameras are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
Do not expose them to water or moisture. They&lt;br /&gt;
are not weather proof.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
Do not leave in excessive heat, like in a car.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
Do not leave in excessive cold, like the&lt;br /&gt;
freezer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
Do not try to force any mechanism on the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
You’re probably doing it wrong if it feels like a lot of force.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
Do not remove the prism viewfinder or the lens. This will&lt;br /&gt;
get dust inside the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
NEVER LEAVE ANYTHING FROM MEDIA LOAN IN YOUR&lt;br /&gt;
CAR!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
As with all Media Loan equipment, you are 100% financially&lt;br /&gt;
responsibly for any damage and repairs done to the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Pentax-top.jpg|thumb|Pentax 6x7]][[File:Pentax film type.jpg|thumb|150x150px|Film type dial]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pentax 6X7 ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Pentax 6x7 is perhaps the easiest to use of&lt;br /&gt;
all our medium format cameras as it most resembles the shape and operation&lt;br /&gt;
of a 35mm camera. It is a single lens reflex (SLR) camera meaning that what you see&lt;br /&gt;
through the viewfinder is the actual image that will appear on the film. This&lt;br /&gt;
camera can shoot both 120 and 220 film. You will not be able to release the&lt;br /&gt;
shutter until there is film loaded    &lt;br /&gt;
==== Before Loading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:IMG 3315.JPG|thumb|150x150px|left|Handle screw]]&lt;br /&gt;
Firstly, be sure that the wooden handle grip is screwed on tight. All of the camera’s weight rests on this handle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then you need to set&lt;br /&gt;
the film type you are working with, either 120 or 220. There are two places&lt;br /&gt;
that need to be adjusted for this. If you’re holding the camera like you would&lt;br /&gt;
to shoot, the first is on the right side of the camera. [[File:Pentax Pressure Plate.jpg|thumb|150x150px|left|Pressure plate film type]]There is a dial that&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Pentax locks.jpg|thumb|150x150px|Spool dial locks]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Pentax wrong.jpg|150x150px|thumb|Incorrect film direction]]&lt;br /&gt;
lets your choose between the two. You will need a quarter or a strong finger&lt;br /&gt;
nail to move it. The second adjustment is found on the inside of the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
Open the camera by pulling down on the silver release on the bottom left side&lt;br /&gt;
of the camera. Notice the black speckled pressure plate on the door. Following&lt;br /&gt;
the direction of the arrows there, gently push the pressure plate down and to&lt;br /&gt;
the side that corresponds to your film type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Loading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Pentax back cover.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|Cover release latch]]&lt;br /&gt;
It is best to do this while sitting as these cameras do not come with neck straps. First, open the back of&lt;br /&gt;
the camera if it is not already open from the previous step. On the bottom of&lt;br /&gt;
the camera are two silver dials that hold the film spools in place. Fold out their handles and turn these&lt;br /&gt;
counter-clockwise and pull them up until the stay put.&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure your empty take-up spool is on the right side. If there is&lt;br /&gt;
no spool in the camera, ask a Media Loan or Photoland staff to give you one.&lt;br /&gt;
(It is common medium format etiquette to leave your old spool in the camera&lt;br /&gt;
when you’re done using it as it is not needed for developing.) [[File:Pentax correct.jpg|150x150px|thumb|Correct film direction]]Like with 35mm film, the Pentax 6x7 needs to be loaded&lt;br /&gt;
in a “up and over” style and not “down and under.”            &lt;br /&gt;
After you’ve aligned the cross in the top of the film spool&lt;br /&gt;
with the notch in the camera, close the silver dials on the bottom of the&lt;br /&gt;
camera. Now pull the film across to the right side of the camera and thread the&lt;br /&gt;
film into the take-up spool just as you would with 35mm film. Use the crank lever to advance the film&lt;br /&gt;
and stop when the arrows on the film paper line up with the arrow on the inside&lt;br /&gt;
of the camera.            &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Close the back of the camera and advance the&lt;br /&gt;
film until “0” is line up with the red dot in the frame counter. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Exposing, Focusing, &amp;amp; Taking a Picture ====&lt;br /&gt;
The '''shutter speed''' is set by the dial on the top left side&lt;br /&gt;
of the camera. The current setting is indicated by whatever number is next to the&lt;br /&gt;
small red LED just to the right of the dial. Since there is no built in light&lt;br /&gt;
meter on this camera, there is no need to set the '''ISO''' for whatever film you are&lt;br /&gt;
using. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If using a flash, you must use a shutter speed on this&lt;br /&gt;
camera of 1/30&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;th&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; of slower. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to do a timed exposure longer than one second&lt;br /&gt;
and you don’t want to keep you finger on the shutter as the “Bulb”&lt;br /&gt;
setting would allow, rotate the shutter speed dial to anywhere between the red “X” and “1000.”&lt;br /&gt;
Now, releasing the shutter will keep it open until you rotate the shutter speed&lt;br /&gt;
dial back to “X”. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The '''aperture''' ring is located on the lens. This is the ring&lt;br /&gt;
closest to the body of the camera and ranges from f/2.4 to f/22. The aperture&lt;br /&gt;
ring will be your primary tool for exposing. Also located on the lens is an&lt;br /&gt;
aperture preview mechanism. This allows you get see your depth of field before&lt;br /&gt;
actually taking a picture. You can lock this switch in &amp;quot;AUTO&amp;quot; mode so&lt;br /&gt;
that you will always be previewing your aperture. To do this, slide the switch&lt;br /&gt;
to &amp;quot;AUTO&amp;quot; and push down. To release it back to manual, push down on the other side of&lt;br /&gt;
the switch. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To focus, simply look through the viewfinder and adjust the&lt;br /&gt;
focus ring until the split viewfinder is even and the image looks crisp.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To release the shutter and take a picture, first crank the film advance level with your right thumb and smoothly and firmly depress the silver button next to the crank.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A cable release can be attached by screwing one into the shutter release button just as with Media Loan's 35mm Pentax K-1000 cameras.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Pentax 6x7 can not take multiple exposure pictures.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Unloading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once all of the frames are exposed you’ll want to unload&lt;br /&gt;
your film. When you’re ready to do this, wind the crank a few more times until&lt;br /&gt;
there is no more tension in the crank lever. By now the protective light-safe&lt;br /&gt;
paper should be covering the film and totally wrapped around the spool.&lt;br /&gt;
Unfasten the silver dials just like when loading film. Keeping a firm grip on the film so that it doesn't unroll,&lt;br /&gt;
lick or peel off the sticky tape on the roll and make sure it is securely attached to the&lt;br /&gt;
spool. Close everything back up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Using a Flash ====&lt;br /&gt;
To use a flash with the Pentax 6x7, first attach the flash to the hot shoe mount on the handle. This camera has options for both X-type sync cables and FP-type sync cables. Use only the X-type as plugging an X cable into an FP housing can cause damage. Again, this camera can only use a flash when the shutter speed is set to 1/30th of a second or slower.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Bronica-top2.jpg|thumb|356x356px|Bronica SQ-B]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bronica ETRS, ETRSI, &amp;amp; SQ-B ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are three different models of the Bronica available at Media Loan: SB-Q, ETRS, and ETRSi. They are very similar in operation except for a few minor things like button placement and the viewfinders and accessories that come with each camera. The aspect ratio that these cameras shoot at is also different. &lt;br /&gt;
* The ETRS and ETRSi have prism viewfinders and are in a 6x6 (square) format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The SB-Q (aka 645) has a wast-level view finder and is in a 6x4.5 (rectangle) format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Bronica begins to feel like a departure from the 35mm cameras. It is essentially a cube with a lens attached. One notices a very different feel when shooting with a Bronica than with the Pentax 6x7. Since a lot of the controls are not in conventional places, it may take some time to get acquainted with this camera. All of the Bronica cameras can only use 120 film. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cartridge doors.jpg|thumb|150x150px|Film cartridge doors]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Bronica cartridge release.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|Cartridge release latches]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Bronica cartridge.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|The film cartridge ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Loading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
To load film, open the back of the camera by pinching the buttons that lie just under the viewfinder that are indicated by arrows. It is spring loaded and the film cartridge may fall out so be prepared. The outer shell will fold down and then the film cartridge can be removed. &lt;br /&gt;
In the Bronica, film moves from top to bottom. This means your new roll of film will be on top and your empty spool on bottom Now that you're holding the film cartridge, notice there are two door flaps on the left side. Using your finger, push them open from the inside out. You will now be able to remove or insert film spools into each slot. Make sure the empty spool is on bottom and the fresh film is on top. Now you will take the film leader and run it over the pressure plate on the opposite side, bringing it down and around to the empty take up spool. A proper loading will have the black side of the paper leader facing outwards over the pressure plate.  [[File:Bronica-Loading.gif|150x150px|thumb|Film direction]]Now, using the manual film advance wheel located on the right side of the cartridge, advance the film until the arrow on the leader aligns with the red arrow on the inside left of the cartridge.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To close the camera, the cartridge must first be aligned properly on the camera body, not inserted into the door. Once the cartridge is in place, close the door. It can be a little tricky to get it perfectly aligned. Do not force anything. If the door won't shut, take the cartridge out and try again. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now wind the film advance lever until it stops moving and the frame counter is at 0. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Bronica viewfinder.JPG|left|thumb|150x150px|Waist-level viewfinder]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Waist-level Viewfinder ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Bronica magnifier.JPG|thumb|150x150px|Magnifier latch]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Bronica magnifier2.JPG|thumb|150x150px|Magnifier]]Many of Media Loan's Bronicas, like the Mamiyas, feature waist-level viewfinders. This is different than a prism viewfinder in which the viewfinder is held up to the eye. Alternatively, waist-level viewfinders are held at the waist and have a &amp;quot;screen&amp;quot; and magnifier for focusing. Most waist-level viewfinders open by simply folding up the top of the camera. Sometimes there is a small latch. There are metal walls that will snap into place once it is open. &lt;br /&gt;
To open the magnifier for critical focusing, there is another release latch on the inside of the focusing hood. To close the magnifier, simply move it back into place with your finger, trying not to touch the actual glass.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some of the Bronicas come with prism viewfinders, which you can ask for. Some of the prism viewfinders are electronic and feature an internal light meter. &lt;br /&gt;
==== Exposing, Focusing, &amp;amp; Taking a Picture ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Bronica shutter speed.JPG|left|thumb|150x150px|Shutter speed dial]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Bronica shutter.JPG|left|thumb|150x150px|Shutter release button]]&lt;br /&gt;
To set the '''shutter speed''', there is a dial on the right side of the camera body. The Bronica has a range of shutter speeds from 1/500th of a second to 8 seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The '''aperture''' is set by twisting the aperture ring on the lens and has a range of f/2.4 to f/22.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are using a Bronica with a built in light meter, set the '''ISO''' to match your film speed by twisting the dial on the left of the viewfinder. If it does not have an internal light meter, you do not have to worry about setting your ISO. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To focus, open the magnifier in the focusing hood as described in the previous section. The Bronica's lens functions conveniently like most other camera lenses. Twist the focus ring until your subject comes into focus.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before '''taking a picture''', the film must be advanced. Do this by winding the crank on the right side of the camera. When there is no film loaded in the camera, the crank will spin indefinitely. Once film has been loaded, the crank will stop itself in the correct position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The shutter release button is a black button located on the front of the camera in the bottom left corner. You can attach a cable release by screwing one into the cable release hole on the left side of the camera. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is preferable to take a picture in the steps in order to ensure a focused picture:&lt;br /&gt;
# Advance the film&lt;br /&gt;
# Set your shutter speed and aperture according to your light meter&lt;br /&gt;
# Focus on your subject&lt;br /&gt;
# Depress the shutter release button&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Bronca flash plug.JPG|thumb|150x150px|Flash plug]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Using a Flash ====&lt;br /&gt;
A flash can be connected using an X-type sync cable. The port for this flash is located on the front side of the camera in the top right corner. When plugging and unplugging a sync cable, always pull gently and straight out. Never use a twisting motion to get it out. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Bronica can conveniently sync with flash at any shutter speed, even at its fastest of 1/500th of a second.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Bronica handles.JPG|left|thumb|150x150px|Mirror lock-up &amp;amp; multiple exposure knobs]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Multiple Exposure ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Bronica cameras can take multiple exposures, exposing a single a single frame an unlimited number of times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do this, first wind the crank to advance the film. There is a small lever next to the crank that needs to be rotated clockwise. A red warning indicator will appear in the viewfinder letting you know that the multiple exposure mode is engaged, however it is always wise to double check that this lever is in the left or counter-clockwise position (single exposure mode) prior to shooting. When the multiple exposure mode is set, the shutter can be cocked with the film advance crank an infinite number of times without actually advancing the film. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Mirror Lockup ====&lt;br /&gt;
The function of a camera's mirror lockup (also abbreviated MLU) is to reduce the potential for motion blur due to the movement of the mirror inside the camera. This movement will potentially effect photographs only when shooting at shutter speeds of 1/60th of a second or slower. Since the mirror that allows viewing and composing through the viewfinder before actually taking a picture is stuck in its upright position, you will no longer be able to use the viewfinder once the MLU function is engaged. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To engage this function on the Bronica, first advance the film with the crank. There is a lever located to the right of the multiple exposure lever. Move this lever counter-clockwise. You will know it is engaged when you can not see anything through the viewfinder. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are three settings for the mirror lockup function. &amp;quot;N&amp;quot; for normal in which the mirror will not lock up, and &amp;quot;S&amp;quot; for single frame and &amp;quot;C&amp;quot; for continuous in which the mirror will be locked up. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are on your last exposure of the roll and the mirror lock up function is still engaged, the shutter will continue to release every 360 degree turn and will not advance the film as would usually happen after the last exposure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mamiya-top.jpg|thumb|Mamiya C330]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mamiya C330 &amp;amp; C220 ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Mamiya cameras at Media Loan are perhaps the least intuitive to use of the medium format cameras. Learning to use one properly, however, is well worth it for both high quality images and mad style points. Like large format cameras, the Mamiya uses bellows to focus. Instead of adjusting the elements of glass within the lens, like with lenses that can focus internally, bellows physically move the lens farther or closer to the plane of film in order to focus.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Mamiya shoots square frames that are 2 1/4 inch long in each direction.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mamiya pressure plate.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|Pressure plate film type]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Before Loading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mamiya-Unlocking.gif|thumb|150x150px|Cover dial rotation]]&lt;br /&gt;
Like the Pentax 6x7, the Mamiya can shoot with either 120 or 220 film and the camera needs to be adjusted accordingly before loading film. First, adjust the orientation of the pressure plate on the inside of the camera to coincide with the kind of film you are using. To open the back of the camera rotate the silver locking disk at the top of the back side of the camera so that the red dot is pointing up and you can slide the disk in the direction of the arrow. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mamiya film type.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|Film type indicator]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mamiya dial.jpg|thumb|150x150px|Parallax dial]]&lt;br /&gt;
Because the Mamiya uses a twin lens system rather than being an SLR, you will also need to adjust the parallax adjustment to match whatever the focal length of the lens is you are using. This can be set by the outer ring on the main dial on the left side of the camera. Depending on the adjustment made and the distance of the camera from the subject, a bar will appear on the left side of the viewfinder. ''This is important to notice as it indicates the top of the frame and everything above the bar will be cut off on the actual film, even though it is present in the viewfinder.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, because the farther the bellows take the lens away from the film, light is increasingly lost along the way from when it enters the lens to when it reaches the film. Inside the viewfinder, the number that the moving bar lands at indicates in number of stops how much to increase the exposure by in order to compensate for the reduced light. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Loading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
With the neck strap around your neck, open the back of the camera as indicated in the previous section. There are two spool release knobs on the left side of the camera. These pull out and will allow you to remove the film spools. Twist these knobs while pulling to lock them in their disengaged position. On the Mamiya, the film moves from bottom to top, opposite of the Bronica cameras move film. Accordingly, place the empty take up spool in the top compartment. Lock it in place. Then place your fresh roll of film in the bottom compartment and lock it in place.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mamiya film loading.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|Loading film]]&lt;br /&gt;
Pull out the film leader from the fresh spool and bring it up to the empty spool and thread it into that spool. Once threaded, turn the film advance crank on the right side of the camera clockwise to advance the film leader until the printed arrow on the leader matches up with the start mark on the inside of the camera (located a little lower than half way down on the right side.) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Close the back of the camera by pushing firmly on either side of the silver locking dial. Once closed, turn the locking dial counter-clockwise to lock the back cover in place. Continue to turn the film advance crank clockwise until it won't turn anymore. Your shutter is now cocked and ready to take a picture. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Exposing, Focusing, &amp;amp; Taking a Picture ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mamiya exposure.JPG|thumb|150x150px|Shutter speed &amp;amp; aperture]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mamiya aperture knob.JPG|thumb|150x150px|Aperture adjustment knob]]&lt;br /&gt;
The Mamiya is slightly different than other cameras in that both the aperture and shutter speed are set on the bottom lens. There are individual rings for each of these settings. The '''aperture''' can be set by moving the little black handle on the left side of the lens and the '''shutter speed''' can be set by twisting the knob with fractions of a second on it. Do not change the shutter speed after the shutter has been cocked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The aperture ranges from f/2.8 to f/22 and the shutter speed ranges from 1/500th of a second to 1 seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since the Mamiya does not have an internal light meter there is no need for an '''ISO''' setting. The camera does however allow you to set the ISO of the film you are using on the dial configuration on the right side of the camera. This does not effect the performance of the camera at all but simply serves as a reminder for the kind of film you are shooting. Be sure to also check out a light meter from Media Loan when checking out a medium format camera.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like the Bronica, most of Media Loan's Mamiyas feature waist-level viewfinders although some of them come with prism viewfinders. You can request either when checking one out. Also like the Bronica, the Mamiya has a magnifier seated within the focusing hood that can be expanded for critical focusing. To '''focus''' the camera, the Mamiya uses bellows that bring the lens closer or farther from the film plane. The lens is a fixed piece of glass and does not focus internally. To adjust the bellows and focus your image, twist either of the large black knobs on the bottom front of the camera. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mamiya shutters.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|Two shutter releases]]&lt;br /&gt;
After your film has been advanced by turning the crank clockwise, the camera is ready to '''take a picture'''. There are two ways to release the shutter. The first is a silver button on the front of the camera in the bottom left corner. A cable release can also be screwed in here. The second way is with the slide mechanism on the right side of the camera. There is a small black lever for your thumb. Slide this downward to release the shutter. As the Mamiyas are quite old, not all of the cameras are able to be fired with either method. Some can only use one or the other and this will be indicated by a note on the camera. Advance the film after each exposure.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mamiya exposure type.jpg|thumb|150x150px|Exposure type dial]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mamiya lock.JPG|left|thumb|150x150px|Shutter release lock]]&lt;br /&gt;
There is a shutter lock on the slide mechanism that can be pushed to the &amp;quot;L&amp;quot; position. This prevents both shutter releases from being able to move and is thus useful to use when transporting the camera or arranging your shot. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To take take a picture using '''multiple exposures''', there is a dial next to the film advance crank that has the option of either &amp;quot;SINGLE&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;MULTI&amp;quot;. Turn this to &amp;quot;MULTI&amp;quot; to be able to exposure a frame multiple times without needing to advance the film. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Unloading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
After twelve frames are exposed, continue to turn the winding crank until there is no more tension on the advance crank. At this point, the protective paper of the film should be rolled up around the take up spool. When unloading the film, keep the spool rolled and hold the film tightly to prevent light exposure. Lick or peel the tab on the film and wrap it firmly around the exposed film. Close the camera back.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mamiya flash plug.jpg|thumb|150x150px|Flash plug]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Using a Flash ====&lt;br /&gt;
To synchronize a flash with the Mamiya, switch the Synchro Selector MX Switch to “X”.  You will need to check out a Vivitar flash and a flash sync cable.  Because the Vivitar flash was not designed to be used with the Mamiya, it will not properly mount on the hot shoe. Therefore, you’ll need to hold it while taking your picture. The Seagull and the Kalimar should not require a sync cable as they can mount onto the hot shoe.&lt;br /&gt;
Caution: Avoid moving the self-timer while the flash sync is set at “M”.  It may cause damage to the self-timer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Linkee14</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Mamiya_aperture_knob.JPG&amp;diff=36388</id>
		<title>File:Mamiya aperture knob.JPG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Mamiya_aperture_knob.JPG&amp;diff=36388"/>
				<updated>2018-01-19T02:50:34Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Linkee14: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Linkee14</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Medium_Format_Cameras_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=36387</id>
		<title>Medium Format Cameras Gear Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Medium_Format_Cameras_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=36387"/>
				<updated>2018-01-19T02:48:55Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Linkee14: /* Bronica ETRS, ETRSI, &amp;amp; SQ-B */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:MediumFormat-top-large.jpg|centre|800x800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
'''A proficiency test is required to check out these cameras.''' Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide and complete the written portion of the [[Medium Format Cameras Proficiency Test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. (You must already be proficient in the 35mm manual camera before obtaining this proficiency.) Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Introduction to Medium Format ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Medium Format vs. 35mm ====&lt;br /&gt;
This is an instructional guide to the medium format film&lt;br /&gt;
cameras available at Media Loan. It will cover a brief introduction to medium&lt;br /&gt;
format photography and then go through the operating steps for each of our&lt;br /&gt;
models. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When talking about film photography, there are three main&lt;br /&gt;
types of film, or formats: 35mm, medium format, and large format. With medium&lt;br /&gt;
and large format, the frame size on the film is much larger than 35mm film and yields significantly more detail and the ability to be printed at very large sizes. In essence, it&lt;br /&gt;
is a question of quality. The size and shape of the actual frame is variable&lt;br /&gt;
depending on the camera (whether your picture is a square, rectangle, skinny&lt;br /&gt;
rectangle, etc.) The size of the frame is often indicated in the name of the&lt;br /&gt;
camera, like the Pentax 6x7 whose frame dimensions are 6cm by 7cm. With 35mm&lt;br /&gt;
photography the size of the frame is always 35mm across regardless of the&lt;br /&gt;
camera used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Medium format film comes wrapped around a plastic spool with&lt;br /&gt;
light-safe black paper layered around the film itself. There is no metal&lt;br /&gt;
canister like with 35mm film. Additionally, when there are no more exposures&lt;br /&gt;
left on the roll, medium format film is not rewound back on to the spool but is&lt;br /&gt;
transferred to another take-up spool on the other side of the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of medium format film, 120 and 220. The&lt;br /&gt;
film is exactly the same except that 220 film contains twice the amount of&lt;br /&gt;
exposures as 120. However, most medium format cameras can shoot only one or the&lt;br /&gt;
other. The Pentax 6x7 and the Mamiya cameras have the ability to shoot both but the camera needs to be adjusted&lt;br /&gt;
to the right setting prior to loading the film. 120 film is the most common and&lt;br /&gt;
allows for 10-12 exposures depending on the camera’s aspect ratio. Keep in mind that not all photo labs can process 220 film.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Tools Required ====&lt;br /&gt;
In order to shoot on a medium format camera, you will need some&lt;br /&gt;
accessories. Some are optional while others are not. The essentials include an&lt;br /&gt;
'''empty film spool''' that your exposed film will be transferred on to (there should&lt;br /&gt;
already be one in the camera from the previous user. If there isn’t ask a Media&lt;br /&gt;
Loan staff member to give you one.) You will also need a '''light meter''' as most of our medium&lt;br /&gt;
format cameras do not have built in meters.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Refer&lt;br /&gt;
to [http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/Light_Meters_Quick_Guide Media Loan’s operating guide for light meters] to find out how to use what&lt;br /&gt;
might be called your medium format camera’s best friend.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other accessories include tripods, cable releases, and&lt;br /&gt;
flashes. If using a flash, remember to also pick up a flash sync cable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Precautions ====&lt;br /&gt;
These cameras are old, expensive, and used by many students. Please give them the respect they deserve. Before handling a camera, be&lt;br /&gt;
aware of what can potentially damage it and what improper usage looks like. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some general rules for these cameras are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
Do not expose them to water or moisture. They&lt;br /&gt;
are not weather proof.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
Do not leave in excessive heat, like in a car.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
Do not leave in excessive cold, like the&lt;br /&gt;
freezer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
Do not try to force any mechanism on the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
You’re probably doing it wrong if it feels like a lot of force.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
Do not remove the prism viewfinder or the lens. This will&lt;br /&gt;
get dust inside the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
NEVER LEAVE ANYTHING FROM MEDIA LOAN IN YOUR&lt;br /&gt;
CAR!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
As with all Media Loan equipment, you are 100% financially&lt;br /&gt;
responsibly for any damage and repairs done to the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Pentax-top.jpg|thumb|Pentax 6x7]][[File:Pentax film type.jpg|thumb|150x150px|Film type dial]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pentax 6X7 ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Pentax 6x7 is perhaps the easiest to use of&lt;br /&gt;
all our medium format cameras as it most resembles the shape and operation&lt;br /&gt;
of a 35mm camera. It is a single lens reflex (SLR) camera meaning that what you see&lt;br /&gt;
through the viewfinder is the actual image that will appear on the film. This&lt;br /&gt;
camera can shoot both 120 and 220 film. You will not be able to release the&lt;br /&gt;
shutter until there is film loaded    &lt;br /&gt;
==== Before Loading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:IMG 3315.JPG|thumb|150x150px|left|Handle screw]]&lt;br /&gt;
Firstly, be sure that the wooden handle grip is screwed on tight. All of the camera’s weight rests on this handle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then you need to set&lt;br /&gt;
the film type you are working with, either 120 or 220. There are two places&lt;br /&gt;
that need to be adjusted for this. If you’re holding the camera like you would&lt;br /&gt;
to shoot, the first is on the right side of the camera. [[File:Pentax Pressure Plate.jpg|thumb|150x150px|left|Pressure plate film type]]There is a dial that&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Pentax locks.jpg|thumb|150x150px|Spool dial locks]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Pentax wrong.jpg|150x150px|thumb|Incorrect film direction]]&lt;br /&gt;
lets your choose between the two. You will need a quarter or a strong finger&lt;br /&gt;
nail to move it. The second adjustment is found on the inside of the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
Open the camera by pulling down on the silver release on the bottom left side&lt;br /&gt;
of the camera. Notice the black speckled pressure plate on the door. Following&lt;br /&gt;
the direction of the arrows there, gently push the pressure plate down and to&lt;br /&gt;
the side that corresponds to your film type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Loading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Pentax back cover.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|Cover release latch]]&lt;br /&gt;
It is best to do this while sitting as these cameras do not come with neck straps. First, open the back of&lt;br /&gt;
the camera if it is not already open from the previous step. On the bottom of&lt;br /&gt;
the camera are two silver dials that hold the film spools in place. Fold out their handles and turn these&lt;br /&gt;
counter-clockwise and pull them up until the stay put.&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure your empty take-up spool is on the right side. If there is&lt;br /&gt;
no spool in the camera, ask a Media Loan or Photoland staff to give you one.&lt;br /&gt;
(It is common medium format etiquette to leave your old spool in the camera&lt;br /&gt;
when you’re done using it as it is not needed for developing.) [[File:Pentax correct.jpg|150x150px|thumb|Correct film direction]]Like with 35mm film, the Pentax 6x7 needs to be loaded&lt;br /&gt;
in a “up and over” style and not “down and under.”            &lt;br /&gt;
After you’ve aligned the cross in the top of the film spool&lt;br /&gt;
with the notch in the camera, close the silver dials on the bottom of the&lt;br /&gt;
camera. Now pull the film across to the right side of the camera and thread the&lt;br /&gt;
film into the take-up spool just as you would with 35mm film. Use the crank lever to advance the film&lt;br /&gt;
and stop when the arrows on the film paper line up with the arrow on the inside&lt;br /&gt;
of the camera.            &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Close the back of the camera and advance the&lt;br /&gt;
film until “0” is line up with the red dot in the frame counter. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Exposing, Focusing, &amp;amp; Taking a Picture ====&lt;br /&gt;
The '''shutter speed''' is set by the dial on the top left side&lt;br /&gt;
of the camera. The current setting is indicated by whatever number is next to the&lt;br /&gt;
small red LED just to the right of the dial. Since there is no built in light&lt;br /&gt;
meter on this camera, there is no need to set the '''ISO''' for whatever film you are&lt;br /&gt;
using. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If using a flash, you must use a shutter speed on this&lt;br /&gt;
camera of 1/30&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;th&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; of slower. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to do a timed exposure longer than one second&lt;br /&gt;
and you don’t want to keep you finger on the shutter as the “Bulb”&lt;br /&gt;
setting would allow, rotate the shutter speed dial to anywhere between the red “X” and “1000.”&lt;br /&gt;
Now, releasing the shutter will keep it open until you rotate the shutter speed&lt;br /&gt;
dial back to “X”. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The '''aperture''' ring is located on the lens. This is the ring&lt;br /&gt;
closest to the body of the camera and ranges from f/2.4 to f/22. The aperture&lt;br /&gt;
ring will be your primary tool for exposing. Also located on the lens is an&lt;br /&gt;
aperture preview mechanism. This allows you get see your depth of field before&lt;br /&gt;
actually taking a picture. You can lock this switch in &amp;quot;AUTO&amp;quot; mode so&lt;br /&gt;
that you will always be previewing your aperture. To do this, slide the switch&lt;br /&gt;
to &amp;quot;AUTO&amp;quot; and push down. To release it back to manual, push down on the other side of&lt;br /&gt;
the switch. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To focus, simply look through the viewfinder and adjust the&lt;br /&gt;
focus ring until the split viewfinder is even and the image looks crisp.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To release the shutter and take a picture, first crank the film advance level with your right thumb and smoothly and firmly depress the silver button next to the crank.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A cable release can be attached by screwing one into the shutter release button just as with Media Loan's 35mm Pentax K-1000 cameras.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Pentax 6x7 can not take multiple exposure pictures.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Unloading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once all of the frames are exposed you’ll want to unload&lt;br /&gt;
your film. When you’re ready to do this, wind the crank a few more times until&lt;br /&gt;
there is no more tension in the crank lever. By now the protective light-safe&lt;br /&gt;
paper should be covering the film and totally wrapped around the spool.&lt;br /&gt;
Unfasten the silver dials just like when loading film. Keeping a firm grip on the film so that it doesn't unroll,&lt;br /&gt;
lick or peel off the sticky tape on the roll and make sure it is securely attached to the&lt;br /&gt;
spool. Close everything back up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Using a Flash ====&lt;br /&gt;
To use a flash with the Pentax 6x7, first attach the flash to the hot shoe mount on the handle. This camera has options for both X-type sync cables and FP-type sync cables. Use only the X-type as plugging an X cable into an FP housing can cause damage. Again, this camera can only use a flash when the shutter speed is set to 1/30th of a second or slower.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Bronica-top2.jpg|thumb|356x356px|Bronica SQ-B]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bronica ETRS, ETRSI, &amp;amp; SQ-B ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are three different models of the Bronica available at Media Loan: SB-Q, ETRS, and ETRSi. They are very similar in operation except for a few minor things like button placement and the viewfinders and accessories that come with each camera. The aspect ratio that these cameras shoot at is also different. &lt;br /&gt;
* The ETRS and ETRSi have prism viewfinders and are in a 6x6 (square) format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The SB-Q (aka 645) has a wast-level view finder and is in a 6x4.5 (rectangle) format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Bronica begins to feel like a departure from the 35mm cameras. It is essentially a cube with a lens attached. One notices a very different feel when shooting with a Bronica than with the Pentax 6x7. Since a lot of the controls are not in conventional places, it may take some time to get acquainted with this camera. All of the Bronica cameras can only use 120 film. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cartridge doors.jpg|thumb|150x150px|Film cartridge doors]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Bronica cartridge release.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|Cartridge release latches]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Bronica cartridge.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|The film cartridge ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Loading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
To load film, open the back of the camera by pinching the buttons that lie just under the viewfinder that are indicated by arrows. It is spring loaded and the film cartridge may fall out so be prepared. The outer shell will fold down and then the film cartridge can be removed. &lt;br /&gt;
In the Bronica, film moves from top to bottom. This means your new roll of film will be on top and your empty spool on bottom Now that you're holding the film cartridge, notice there are two door flaps on the left side. Using your finger, push them open from the inside out. You will now be able to remove or insert film spools into each slot. Make sure the empty spool is on bottom and the fresh film is on top. Now you will take the film leader and run it over the pressure plate on the opposite side, bringing it down and around to the empty take up spool. A proper loading will have the black side of the paper leader facing outwards over the pressure plate.  [[File:Bronica-Loading.gif|150x150px|thumb|Film direction]]Now, using the manual film advance wheel located on the right side of the cartridge, advance the film until the arrow on the leader aligns with the red arrow on the inside left of the cartridge.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To close the camera, the cartridge must first be aligned properly on the camera body, not inserted into the door. Once the cartridge is in place, close the door. It can be a little tricky to get it perfectly aligned. Do not force anything. If the door won't shut, take the cartridge out and try again. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now wind the film advance lever until it stops moving and the frame counter is at 0. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Bronica viewfinder.JPG|left|thumb|150x150px|Waist-level viewfinder]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Waist-level Viewfinder ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Bronica magnifier.JPG|thumb|150x150px|Magnifier latch]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Bronica magnifier2.JPG|thumb|150x150px|Magnifier]]Many of Media Loan's Bronicas, like the Mamiyas, feature waist-level viewfinders. This is different than a prism viewfinder in which the viewfinder is held up to the eye. Alternatively, waist-level viewfinders are held at the waist and have a &amp;quot;screen&amp;quot; and magnifier for focusing. Most waist-level viewfinders open by simply folding up the top of the camera. Sometimes there is a small latch. There are metal walls that will snap into place once it is open. &lt;br /&gt;
To open the magnifier for critical focusing, there is another release latch on the inside of the focusing hood. To close the magnifier, simply move it back into place with your finger, trying not to touch the actual glass.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some of the Bronicas come with prism viewfinders, which you can ask for. Some of the prism viewfinders are electronic and feature an internal light meter. &lt;br /&gt;
==== Exposing, Focusing, &amp;amp; Taking a Picture ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Bronica shutter speed.JPG|left|thumb|150x150px|Shutter speed dial]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Bronica shutter.JPG|left|thumb|150x150px|Shutter release button]]&lt;br /&gt;
To set the '''shutter speed''', there is a dial on the right side of the camera body. The Bronica has a range of shutter speeds from 1/500th of a second to 8 seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The '''aperture''' is set by twisting the aperture ring on the lens and has a range of f/2.4 to f/22.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are using a Bronica with a built in light meter, set the '''ISO''' to match your film speed by twisting the dial on the left of the viewfinder. If it does not have an internal light meter, you do not have to worry about setting your ISO. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To focus, open the magnifier in the focusing hood as described in the previous section. The Bronica's lens functions conveniently like most other camera lenses. Twist the focus ring until your subject comes into focus.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before '''taking a picture''', the film must be advanced. Do this by winding the crank on the right side of the camera. When there is no film loaded in the camera, the crank will spin indefinitely. Once film has been loaded, the crank will stop itself in the correct position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The shutter release button is a black button located on the front of the camera in the bottom left corner. You can attach a cable release by screwing one into the cable release hole on the left side of the camera. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is preferable to take a picture in the steps in order to ensure a focused picture:&lt;br /&gt;
# Advance the film&lt;br /&gt;
# Set your shutter speed and aperture according to your light meter&lt;br /&gt;
# Focus on your subject&lt;br /&gt;
# Depress the shutter release button&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Bronca flash plug.JPG|thumb|150x150px|Flash plug]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Using a Flash ====&lt;br /&gt;
A flash can be connected using an X-type sync cable. The port for this flash is located on the front side of the camera in the top right corner. When plugging and unplugging a sync cable, always pull gently and straight out. Never use a twisting motion to get it out. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Bronica can conveniently sync with flash at any shutter speed, even at its fastest of 1/500th of a second.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Bronica handles.JPG|left|thumb|150x150px|Mirror lock-up &amp;amp; multiple exposure knobs]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Multiple Exposure ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Bronica cameras can take multiple exposures, exposing a single a single frame an unlimited number of times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do this, first wind the crank to advance the film. There is a small lever next to the crank that needs to be rotated clockwise. A red warning indicator will appear in the viewfinder letting you know that the multiple exposure mode is engaged, however it is always wise to double check that this lever is in the left or counter-clockwise position (single exposure mode) prior to shooting. When the multiple exposure mode is set, the shutter can be cocked with the film advance crank an infinite number of times without actually advancing the film. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Mirror Lockup ====&lt;br /&gt;
The function of a camera's mirror lockup (also abbreviated MLU) is to reduce the potential for motion blur due to the movement of the mirror inside the camera. This movement will potentially effect photographs only when shooting at shutter speeds of 1/60th of a second or slower. Since the mirror that allows viewing and composing through the viewfinder before actually taking a picture is stuck in its upright position, you will no longer be able to use the viewfinder once the MLU function is engaged. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To engage this function on the Bronica, first advance the film with the crank. There is a lever located to the right of the multiple exposure lever. Move this lever counter-clockwise. You will know it is engaged when you can not see anything through the viewfinder. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are three settings for the mirror lockup function. &amp;quot;N&amp;quot; for normal in which the mirror will not lock up, and &amp;quot;S&amp;quot; for single frame and &amp;quot;C&amp;quot; for continuous in which the mirror will be locked up. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are on your last exposure of the roll and the mirror lock up function is still engaged, the shutter will continue to release every 360 degree turn and will not advance the film as would usually happen after the last exposure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mamiya-top.jpg|thumb|Mamiya C330]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mamiya C330 &amp;amp; C220 ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Mamiya cameras at Media Loan are perhaps the least intuitive to use of the medium format cameras. Learning to use one properly, however, is well worth it for both high quality images and mad style points. Like large format cameras, the Mamiya uses bellows to focus. Instead of adjusting the elements of glass within the lens, like with lenses that can focus internally, bellows physically move the lens farther or closer to the plane of film in order to focus.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Mamiya shoots square frames that are 2 1/4 inch long in each direction.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mamiya pressure plate.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|Pressure plate film type]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Before Loading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mamiya-Unlocking.gif|thumb|150x150px|Cover dial rotation]]&lt;br /&gt;
Like the Pentax 6x7, the Mamiya can shoot with either 120 or 220 film and the camera needs to be adjusted accordingly before loading film. First, adjust the orientation of the pressure plate on the inside of the camera to coincide with the kind of film you are using. To open the back of the camera rotate the silver locking disk at the top of the back side of the camera so that the red dot is pointing up and you can slide the disk in the direction of the arrow. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mamiya film type.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|Film type indicator]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mamiya dial.jpg|thumb|150x150px|Parallax dial]]&lt;br /&gt;
Because the Mamiya uses a twin lens system rather than being an SLR, you will also need to adjust the parallax adjustment to match whatever the focal length of the lens is you are using. This can be set by the outer ring on the main dial on the left side of the camera. Depending on the adjustment made and the distance of the camera from the subject, a bar will appear on the left side of the viewfinder. ''This is important to notice as it indicates the top of the frame and everything above the bar will be cut off on the actual film, even though it is present in the viewfinder.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, because the farther the bellows take the lens away from the film, light is increasingly lost along the way from when it enters the lens to when it reaches the film. Inside the viewfinder, the number that the moving bar lands at indicates in number of stops how much to increase the exposure by in order to compensate for the reduced light. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Loading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
With the neck strap around your neck, open the back of the camera as indicated in the previous section. There are two spool release knobs on the left side of the camera. These pull out and will allow you to remove the film spools. Twist these knobs while pulling to lock them in their disengaged position. On the Mamiya, the film moves from bottom to top, opposite of the Bronica cameras move film. Accordingly, place the empty take up spool in the top compartment. Lock it in place. Then place your fresh roll of film in the bottom compartment and lock it in place.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mamiya film loading.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|Loading film]]&lt;br /&gt;
Pull out the film leader from the fresh spool and bring it up to the empty spool and thread it into that spool. Once threaded, turn the film advance crank on the right side of the camera clockwise to advance the film leader until the printed arrow on the leader matches up with the start mark on the inside of the camera (located a little lower than half way down on the right side.) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Close the back of the camera by pushing firmly on either side of the silver locking dial. Once closed, turn the locking dial counter-clockwise to lock the back cover in place. Continue to turn the film advance crank clockwise until it won't turn anymore. Your shutter is now cocked and ready to take a picture. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Exposing, Focusing, &amp;amp; Taking a Picture ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Mamiya is slightly different than other cameras in that both the aperture and shutter speed are set on the bottom lens. There are individual rings for each of these settings. The '''aperture''' can be set by moving the little black handle on the left side of the lens and the '''shutter speed''' can be set by twisting the knob with fractions of a second on it. Do not change the shutter speed after the shutter has been cocked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The aperture ranges from f/2.8 to f/22 and the shutter speed ranges from 1/500th of a second to 1 seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since the Mamiya does not have an internal light meter there is no need for an '''ISO''' setting. The camera does however allow you to set the ISO of the film you are using on the dial configuration on the right side of the camera. This does not effect the performance of the camera at all but simply serves as a reminder for the kind of film you are shooting. Be sure to also check out a light meter from Media Loan when checking out a medium format camera.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like the Bronica, most of Media Loan's Mamiyas feature waist-level viewfinders although some of them come with prism viewfinders. You can request either when checking one out. Also like the Bronica, the Mamiya has a magnifier seated within the focusing hood that can be expanded for critical focusing. To '''focus''' the camera, the Mamiya uses bellows that bring the lens closer or farther from the film plane. The lens is a fixed piece of glass and does not focus internally. To adjust the bellows and focus your image, twist either of the large black knobs on the bottom front of the camera. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mamiya shutters.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|Two shutter releases]]&lt;br /&gt;
After your film has been advanced by turning the crank clockwise, the camera is ready to '''take a picture'''. There are two ways to release the shutter. The first is a silver button on the front of the camera in the bottom left corner. A cable release can also be screwed in here. The second way is with the slide mechanism on the right side of the camera. There is a small black lever for your thumb. Slide this downward to release the shutter. As the Mamiyas are quite old, not all of the cameras are able to be fired with either method. Some can only use one or the other and this will be indicated by a note on the camera. Advance the film after each exposure.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mamiya exposure type.jpg|thumb|150x150px|Exposure type dial]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mamiya lock.JPG|left|thumb|150x150px|Shutter release lock]]&lt;br /&gt;
There is a shutter lock on the slide mechanism that can be pushed to the &amp;quot;L&amp;quot; position. This prevents both shutter releases from being able to move and is thus useful to use when transporting the camera or arranging your shot. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To take take a picture using '''multiple exposures''', there is a dial next to the film advance crank that has the option of either &amp;quot;SINGLE&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;MULTI&amp;quot;. Turn this to &amp;quot;MULTI&amp;quot; to be able to exposure a frame multiple times without needing to advance the film. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Unloading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
After twelve frames are exposed, continue to turn the winding crank until there is no more tension on the advance crank. At this point, the protective paper of the film should be rolled up around the take up spool. When unloading the film, keep the spool rolled and hold the film tightly to prevent light exposure. Lick or peel the tab on the film and wrap it firmly around the exposed film. Close the camera back.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mamiya flash plug.jpg|thumb|150x150px|Flash plug]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Using a Flash ====&lt;br /&gt;
To synchronize a flash with the Mamiya, switch the Synchro Selector MX Switch to “X”.  You will need to check out a Vivitar flash and a flash sync cable.  Because the Vivitar flash was not designed to be used with the Mamiya, it will not properly mount on the hot shoe. Therefore, you’ll need to hold it while taking your picture. The Seagull and the Kalimar should not require a sync cable as they can mount onto the hot shoe.&lt;br /&gt;
Caution: Avoid moving the self-timer while the flash sync is set at “M”.  It may cause damage to the self-timer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Linkee14</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Mamiya_exposure.JPG&amp;diff=36386</id>
		<title>File:Mamiya exposure.JPG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Mamiya_exposure.JPG&amp;diff=36386"/>
				<updated>2018-01-19T02:48:44Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Linkee14: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Linkee14</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Mamiya_lock.JPG&amp;diff=36385</id>
		<title>File:Mamiya lock.JPG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Mamiya_lock.JPG&amp;diff=36385"/>
				<updated>2018-01-19T02:46:40Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Linkee14: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Linkee14</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Mamiya_shutters.jpg&amp;diff=36384</id>
		<title>File:Mamiya shutters.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Mamiya_shutters.jpg&amp;diff=36384"/>
				<updated>2018-01-19T02:45:01Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Linkee14: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Linkee14</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Mamiya_pressure_plate.jpg&amp;diff=36383</id>
		<title>File:Mamiya pressure plate.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Mamiya_pressure_plate.jpg&amp;diff=36383"/>
				<updated>2018-01-19T02:44:10Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Linkee14: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Linkee14</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Mamiya_flash_plug.jpg&amp;diff=36382</id>
		<title>File:Mamiya flash plug.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Mamiya_flash_plug.jpg&amp;diff=36382"/>
				<updated>2018-01-19T02:43:00Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Linkee14: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Linkee14</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Mamiya_film_type.jpg&amp;diff=36381</id>
		<title>File:Mamiya film type.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Mamiya_film_type.jpg&amp;diff=36381"/>
				<updated>2018-01-19T02:41:58Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Linkee14: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Linkee14</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Mamiya_film_loading.jpg&amp;diff=36380</id>
		<title>File:Mamiya film loading.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Mamiya_film_loading.jpg&amp;diff=36380"/>
				<updated>2018-01-19T02:40:56Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Linkee14: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Linkee14</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Mamiya_exposure_type.jpg&amp;diff=36379</id>
		<title>File:Mamiya exposure type.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Mamiya_exposure_type.jpg&amp;diff=36379"/>
				<updated>2018-01-19T02:39:28Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Linkee14: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Linkee14</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Mamiya_dial.jpg&amp;diff=36378</id>
		<title>File:Mamiya dial.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Mamiya_dial.jpg&amp;diff=36378"/>
				<updated>2018-01-19T02:37:36Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Linkee14: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Linkee14</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Bronca_flash_plug.JPG&amp;diff=36377</id>
		<title>File:Bronca flash plug.JPG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Bronca_flash_plug.JPG&amp;diff=36377"/>
				<updated>2018-01-19T02:28:16Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Linkee14: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Linkee14</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Bronica_handles.JPG&amp;diff=36376</id>
		<title>File:Bronica handles.JPG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Bronica_handles.JPG&amp;diff=36376"/>
				<updated>2018-01-19T02:26:33Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Linkee14: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Linkee14</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Bronica_shutter.JPG&amp;diff=36375</id>
		<title>File:Bronica shutter.JPG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Bronica_shutter.JPG&amp;diff=36375"/>
				<updated>2018-01-19T02:24:07Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Linkee14: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Linkee14</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Bronica_shutter_speed.JPG&amp;diff=36374</id>
		<title>File:Bronica shutter speed.JPG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Bronica_shutter_speed.JPG&amp;diff=36374"/>
				<updated>2018-01-19T02:22:05Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Linkee14: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Linkee14</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Medium_Format_Cameras_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=36373</id>
		<title>Medium Format Cameras Gear Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Medium_Format_Cameras_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=36373"/>
				<updated>2018-01-19T02:20:17Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Linkee14: /* Loading Film */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:MediumFormat-top-large.jpg|centre|800x800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
'''A proficiency test is required to check out these cameras.''' Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide and complete the written portion of the [[Medium Format Cameras Proficiency Test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. (You must already be proficient in the 35mm manual camera before obtaining this proficiency.) Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Introduction to Medium Format ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Medium Format vs. 35mm ====&lt;br /&gt;
This is an instructional guide to the medium format film&lt;br /&gt;
cameras available at Media Loan. It will cover a brief introduction to medium&lt;br /&gt;
format photography and then go through the operating steps for each of our&lt;br /&gt;
models. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When talking about film photography, there are three main&lt;br /&gt;
types of film, or formats: 35mm, medium format, and large format. With medium&lt;br /&gt;
and large format, the frame size on the film is much larger than 35mm film and yields significantly more detail and the ability to be printed at very large sizes. In essence, it&lt;br /&gt;
is a question of quality. The size and shape of the actual frame is variable&lt;br /&gt;
depending on the camera (whether your picture is a square, rectangle, skinny&lt;br /&gt;
rectangle, etc.) The size of the frame is often indicated in the name of the&lt;br /&gt;
camera, like the Pentax 6x7 whose frame dimensions are 6cm by 7cm. With 35mm&lt;br /&gt;
photography the size of the frame is always 35mm across regardless of the&lt;br /&gt;
camera used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Medium format film comes wrapped around a plastic spool with&lt;br /&gt;
light-safe black paper layered around the film itself. There is no metal&lt;br /&gt;
canister like with 35mm film. Additionally, when there are no more exposures&lt;br /&gt;
left on the roll, medium format film is not rewound back on to the spool but is&lt;br /&gt;
transferred to another take-up spool on the other side of the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of medium format film, 120 and 220. The&lt;br /&gt;
film is exactly the same except that 220 film contains twice the amount of&lt;br /&gt;
exposures as 120. However, most medium format cameras can shoot only one or the&lt;br /&gt;
other. The Pentax 6x7 and the Mamiya cameras have the ability to shoot both but the camera needs to be adjusted&lt;br /&gt;
to the right setting prior to loading the film. 120 film is the most common and&lt;br /&gt;
allows for 10-12 exposures depending on the camera’s aspect ratio. Keep in mind that not all photo labs can process 220 film.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Tools Required ====&lt;br /&gt;
In order to shoot on a medium format camera, you will need some&lt;br /&gt;
accessories. Some are optional while others are not. The essentials include an&lt;br /&gt;
'''empty film spool''' that your exposed film will be transferred on to (there should&lt;br /&gt;
already be one in the camera from the previous user. If there isn’t ask a Media&lt;br /&gt;
Loan staff member to give you one.) You will also need a '''light meter''' as most of our medium&lt;br /&gt;
format cameras do not have built in meters.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Refer&lt;br /&gt;
to [http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/Light_Meters_Quick_Guide Media Loan’s operating guide for light meters] to find out how to use what&lt;br /&gt;
might be called your medium format camera’s best friend.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other accessories include tripods, cable releases, and&lt;br /&gt;
flashes. If using a flash, remember to also pick up a flash sync cable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Precautions ====&lt;br /&gt;
These cameras are old, expensive, and used by many students. Please give them the respect they deserve. Before handling a camera, be&lt;br /&gt;
aware of what can potentially damage it and what improper usage looks like. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some general rules for these cameras are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
Do not expose them to water or moisture. They&lt;br /&gt;
are not weather proof.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
Do not leave in excessive heat, like in a car.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
Do not leave in excessive cold, like the&lt;br /&gt;
freezer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
Do not try to force any mechanism on the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
You’re probably doing it wrong if it feels like a lot of force.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
Do not remove the prism viewfinder or the lens. This will&lt;br /&gt;
get dust inside the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
NEVER LEAVE ANYTHING FROM MEDIA LOAN IN YOUR&lt;br /&gt;
CAR!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
As with all Media Loan equipment, you are 100% financially&lt;br /&gt;
responsibly for any damage and repairs done to the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Pentax-top.jpg|thumb]][[File:Pentax film type.jpg|thumb|150x150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pentax 6X7 ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Pentax 6x7 is perhaps the easiest to use of&lt;br /&gt;
all our medium format cameras as it most resembles the shape and operation&lt;br /&gt;
of a 35mm camera. It is a single lens reflex (SLR) camera meaning that what you see&lt;br /&gt;
through the viewfinder is the actual image that will appear on the film. This&lt;br /&gt;
camera can shoot both 120 and 220 film. You will not be able to release the&lt;br /&gt;
shutter until there is film loaded    &lt;br /&gt;
==== Before Loading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:IMG 3315.JPG|thumb|150x150px|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
Firstly, be sure that the wooden handle grip is screwed on tight. All of the camera’s weight rests on this handle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then you need to set&lt;br /&gt;
the film type you are working with, either 120 or 220. There are two places&lt;br /&gt;
that need to be adjusted for this. If you’re holding the camera like you would&lt;br /&gt;
to shoot, the first is on the right side of the camera. [[File:Pentax Pressure Plate.jpg|thumb|150x150px|left]]There is a dial that&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Pentax locks.jpg|thumb|150x150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Pentax wrong.jpg|150x150px|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
lets your choose between the two. You will need a quarter or a strong finger&lt;br /&gt;
nail to move it. The second adjustment is found on the inside of the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
Open the camera by pulling down on the silver release on the bottom left side&lt;br /&gt;
of the camera. Notice the black speckled pressure plate on the door. Following&lt;br /&gt;
the direction of the arrows there, gently push the pressure plate down and to&lt;br /&gt;
the side that corresponds to your film type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Loading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Pentax back cover.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
It is best to do this while sitting as these cameras do not come with neck straps. First, open the back of&lt;br /&gt;
the camera if it is not already open from the previous step. On the bottom of&lt;br /&gt;
the camera are two silver dials that hold the film spools in place. Fold out their handles and turn these&lt;br /&gt;
counter-clockwise and pull them up until the stay put.&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure your empty take-up spool is on the right side. If there is&lt;br /&gt;
no spool in the camera, ask a Media Loan or Photoland staff to give you one.&lt;br /&gt;
(It is common medium format etiquette to leave your old spool in the camera&lt;br /&gt;
when you’re done using it as it is not needed for developing.) [[File:Pentax correct.jpg|150x150px|thumb]]Like with 35mm film, the Pentax 6x7 needs to be loaded&lt;br /&gt;
in a “up and over” style and not “down and under.”            &lt;br /&gt;
After you’ve aligned the cross in the top of the film spool&lt;br /&gt;
with the notch in the camera, close the silver dials on the bottom of the&lt;br /&gt;
camera. Now pull the film across to the right side of the camera and thread the&lt;br /&gt;
film into the take-up spool just as you would with 35mm film. Use the crank lever to advance the film&lt;br /&gt;
and stop when the arrows on the film paper line up with the arrow on the inside&lt;br /&gt;
of the camera.            &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Close the back of the camera and advance the&lt;br /&gt;
film until “0” is line up with the red dot in the frame counter. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Exposing, Focusing, &amp;amp; Taking a Picture ====&lt;br /&gt;
The '''shutter speed''' is set by the dial on the top left side&lt;br /&gt;
of the camera. The current setting is indicated by whatever number is next to the&lt;br /&gt;
small red LED just to the right of the dial. Since there is no built in light&lt;br /&gt;
meter on this camera, there is no need to set the '''ISO''' for whatever film you are&lt;br /&gt;
using. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If using a flash, you must use a shutter speed on this&lt;br /&gt;
camera of 1/30&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;th&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; of slower. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to do a timed exposure longer than one second&lt;br /&gt;
and you don’t want to keep you finger on the shutter as the “Bulb”&lt;br /&gt;
setting would allow, rotate the shutter speed dial to anywhere between the red “X” and “1000.”&lt;br /&gt;
Now, releasing the shutter will keep it open until you rotate the shutter speed&lt;br /&gt;
dial back to “X”. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The '''aperture''' ring is located on the lens. This is the ring&lt;br /&gt;
closest to the body of the camera and ranges from f/2.4 to f/22. The aperture&lt;br /&gt;
ring will be your primary tool for exposing. Also located on the lens is an&lt;br /&gt;
aperture preview mechanism. This allows you get see your depth of field before&lt;br /&gt;
actually taking a picture. You can lock this switch in &amp;quot;AUTO&amp;quot; mode so&lt;br /&gt;
that you will always be previewing your aperture. To do this, slide the switch&lt;br /&gt;
to &amp;quot;AUTO&amp;quot; and push down. To release it back to manual, push down on the other side of&lt;br /&gt;
the switch. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To focus, simply look through the viewfinder and adjust the&lt;br /&gt;
focus ring until the split viewfinder is even and the image looks crisp.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To release the shutter and take a picture, first crank the film advance level with your right thumb and smoothly and firmly depress the silver button next to the crank.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A cable release can be attached by screwing one into the shutter release button just as with Media Loan's 35mm Pentax K-1000 cameras.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Pentax 6x7 can not take multiple exposure pictures.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Unloading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once all of the frames are exposed you’ll want to unload&lt;br /&gt;
your film. When you’re ready to do this, wind the crank a few more times until&lt;br /&gt;
there is no more tension in the crank lever. By now the protective light-safe&lt;br /&gt;
paper should be covering the film and totally wrapped around the spool.&lt;br /&gt;
Unfasten the silver dials just like when loading film. Keeping a firm grip on the film so that it doesn't unroll,&lt;br /&gt;
lick or peel off the sticky tape on the roll and make sure it is securely attached to the&lt;br /&gt;
spool. Close everything back up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Using a Flash ====&lt;br /&gt;
To use a flash with the Pentax 6x7, first attach the flash to the hot shoe mount on the handle. This camera has options for both X-type sync cables and FP-type sync cables. Use only the X-type as plugging an X cable into an FP housing can cause damage. Again, this camera can only use a flash when the shutter speed is set to 1/30th of a second or slower.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Bronica-top2.jpg|thumb|356x356px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bronica ETRS, ETRSI, &amp;amp; SQ-B ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are three different models of the Bronica available at Media Loan: SB-Q, ETRS, and ETRSi. They are very similar in operation except for a few minor things like button placement and the viewfinders and accessories that come with each camera. The aspect ratio that these cameras shoot at is also different. &lt;br /&gt;
* The ETRS and ETRSi have prism viewfinders and are in a 6x6 (square) format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The SB-Q (aka 645) has a wast-level view finder and is in a 6x4.5 (rectangle) format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Bronica begins to feel like a departure from the 35mm cameras. It is essentially a cube with a lens attached. One notices a very different feel when shooting with a Bronica than with the Pentax 6x7. Since a lot of the controls are not in conventional places, it may take some time to get acquainted with this camera. All of the Bronica cameras can only use 120 film. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Bronica cartridge release.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|Cartridge release latches]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Bronica cartridge.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px|The film cartridge ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Loading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
To load film, open the back of the camera by pinching the buttons that lie just under the viewfinder that are indicated by arrows. It is spring loaded and the film cartridge may fall out so be prepared. The outer shell will fold down and then the film cartridge can be removed. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Cartridge doors.jpg|thumb|150x150px|Film cartridge doors]]&lt;br /&gt;
In the Bronica, film moves from top to bottom. This means your new roll of film will be on top and your empty spool on bottom Now that you're holding the film cartridge, notice there are two door flaps on the left side. Using your finger, push them open from the inside out. You will now be able to remove or insert film spools into each slot. Make sure the empty spool is on bottom and the fresh film is on top. Now you will take the film leader and run it over the pressure plate on the opposite side, bringing it down and around to the empty take up spool. A proper loading will have the black side of the paper leader facing outwards over the pressure plate.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, using the manual film advance wheel located on the right side of the cartridge, advance the film until the arrow on the leader aligns with the red arrow on the inside left of the cartridge.  [[File:Bronica-Loading.gif|150x150px|thumb|Film direction]]To close the camera, the cartridge must first be aligned properly on the camera body, not inserted into the door. Once the cartridge is in place, close the door. It can be a little tricky to get it perfectly aligned. Do not force anything. If the door won't shut, take the cartridge out and try again. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now wind the film advance lever until it stops moving and the frame counter is at 0. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Bronica viewfinder.JPG|left|thumb|150x150px|Waist-level viewfinder]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Waist-level Viewfinder ====&lt;br /&gt;
Many of Media Loan's Bronicas, like the Mamiyas, feature waist-level viewfinders. This is different than a prism viewfinder in which the viewfinder is held up to the eye. Alternatively, waist-level viewfinders are held at the waist and have a &amp;quot;screen&amp;quot; and magnifier for focusing. Most waist-level viewfinders open by simply folding up the top of the camera. Sometimes there is a small latch. There are metal walls that will snap into place once it is open. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Bronica magnifier.JPG|thumb|150x150px|Magnifier latch]]&lt;br /&gt;
To open the magnifier for critical focusing, there is another release latch on the inside of the focusing hood. To close the magnifier, simply move it back into place with your finger, trying not to touch the actual glass.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some of the Bronicas come with prism viewfinders, which you can ask for. Some of the prism viewfinders are electronic and feature an internal light meter. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Bronica magnifier2.JPG|thumb|150x150px|Magnifier]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Exposing, Focusing, &amp;amp; Taking a Picture ====&lt;br /&gt;
To set the '''shutter speed''', there is a dial on the right side of the camera body. The Bronica has a range of shutter speeds from 1/500th of a second to 8 seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The '''aperture''' is set by twisting the aperture ring on the lens and has a range of f/2.4 to f/22.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are using a Bronica with a built in light meter, set the '''ISO''' to match your film speed by twisting the dial on the left of the viewfinder. If it does not have an internal light meter, you do not have to worry about setting your ISO. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To focus, open the magnifier in the focusing hood as described in the previous section. The Bronica's lens functions conveniently like most other camera lenses. Twist the focus ring until your subject comes into focus.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before '''taking a picture''', the film must be advanced. Do this by winding the crank on the right side of the camera. When there is no film loaded in the camera, the crank will spin indefinitely. Once film has been loaded, the crank will stop itself in the correct position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The shutter release button is a black button located on the front of the camera in the bottom left corner. You can attach a cable release by screwing one into the cable release hole on the left side of the camera. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is preferable to take a picture in the steps in order to ensure a focused picture:&lt;br /&gt;
# Advance the film&lt;br /&gt;
# Set your shutter speed and aperture according to your light meter&lt;br /&gt;
# Focus on your subject&lt;br /&gt;
# Depress the shutter release button&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Using a Flash ====&lt;br /&gt;
A flash can be connected using an X-type sync cable. The port for this flash is located on the front side of the camera in the top right corner. When plugging and unplugging a sync cable, always pull gently and straight out. Never use a twisting motion to get it out. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Bronica can conveniently sync with flash at any shutter speed, even at its fastest of 1/500th of a second.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Multiple Exposure ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Bronica cameras can take multiple exposures, exposing a single a single frame an unlimited number of times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do this, first wind the crank to advance the film. There is a small lever next to the crank that needs to be rotated clockwise. A red warning indicator will appear in the viewfinder letting you know that the multiple exposure mode is engaged, however it is always wise to double check that this lever is in the left or counter-clockwise position (single exposure mode) prior to shooting. When the multiple exposure mode is set, the shutter can be cocked with the film advance crank an infinite number of times without actually advancing the film. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Mirror Lockup ====&lt;br /&gt;
The function of a camera's mirror lockup (also abbreviated MLU) is to reduce the potential for motion blur due to the movement of the mirror inside the camera. This movement will potentially effect photographs only when shooting at shutter speeds of 1/60th of a second or slower. Since the mirror that allows viewing and composing through the viewfinder before actually taking a picture is stuck in its upright position, you will no longer be able to use the viewfinder once the MLU function is engaged. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To engage this function on the Bronica, first advance the film with the crank. There is a lever located to the right of the multiple exposure lever. Move this lever counter-clockwise. You will know it is engaged when you can not see anything through the viewfinder. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are three settings for the mirror lockup function. &amp;quot;N&amp;quot; for normal in which the mirror will not lock up, and &amp;quot;S&amp;quot; for single frame and &amp;quot;C&amp;quot; for continuous in which the mirror will be locked up. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are on your last exposure of the roll and the mirror lock up function is still engaged, the shutter will continue to release every 360 degree turn and will not advance the film as would usually happen after the last exposure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Electronic Prism Viewfinder Operation ====&lt;br /&gt;
...&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mamiya-top.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mamiya C330 &amp;amp; C220 ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Mamiya cameras at Media Loan are perhaps the least intuitive to use of the medium format cameras. Learning to use one properly, however, is well worth it for both high quality images and mad style points. Like large format cameras, the Mamiya uses bellows to focus. Instead of adjusting the elements of glass within the lens, like with lenses that can focus internally, bellows physically move the lens farther or closer to the plane of film in order to focus.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Mamiya shoots square frames that are 2 1/4 inch long in each direction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Before Loading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mamiya-Unlocking.gif|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
Like the Pentax 6x7, the Mamiya can shoot with either 120 or 220 film and the camera needs to be adjusted accordingly before loading film. First, adjust the orientation of the pressure plate on the inside of the camera to coincide with the kind of film you are using. To open the back of the camera rotate the silver locking disk at the top of the back side of the camera so that the red dot is pointing up and you can slide the disk in the direction of the arrow. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because the Mamiya uses a twin lens system rather than being an SLR, you will also need to adjust the parallax adjustment to match whatever the focal length of the lens is you are using. This can be set by the outer ring on the main dial on the left side of the camera. Depending on the adjustment made and the distance of the camera from the subject, a bar will appear on the left side of the viewfinder. ''This is important to notice as it indicates the top of the frame and everything above the bar will be cut off on the actual film, even though it is present in the viewfinder.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, because the farther the bellows take the lens away from the film, light is increasingly lost along the way from when it enters the lens to when it reaches the film. Inside the viewfinder, the number that the moving bar lands at indicates in number of stops how much to increase the exposure by in order to compensate for the reduced light. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Loading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
With the neck strap around your neck, open the back of the camera as indicated in the previous section. There are two spool release knobs on the left side of the camera. These pull out and will allow you to remove the film spools. Twist these knobs while pulling to lock them in their disengaged position. On the Mamiya, the film moves from bottom to top, opposite of the Bronica cameras move film. Accordingly, place the empty take up spool in the top compartment. Lock it in place. Then place your fresh roll of film in the bottom compartment and lock it in place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pull out the film leader from the fresh spool and bring it up to the empty spool and thread it into that spool. Once threaded, turn the film advance crank on the right side of the camera clockwise to advance the film leader until the printed arrow on the leader matches up with the start mark on the inside of the camera (located a little lower than half way down on the right side.) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Close the back of the camera by pushing firmly on either side of the silver locking dial. Once closed, turn the locking dial counter-clockwise to lock the back cover in place. Continue to turn the film advance crank clockwise until it won't turn anymore. Your shutter is now cocked and ready to take a picture. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Exposing, Focusing, &amp;amp; Taking a Picture ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Mamiya is slightly different than other cameras in that both the aperture and shutter speed are set on the bottom lens. There are individual rings for each of these settings. The '''aperture''' can be set by moving the little black handle on the left side of the lens and the '''shutter speed''' can be set by twisting the knob with fractions of a second on it. Do not change the shutter speed after the shutter has been cocked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The aperture ranges from f/2.8 to f/22 and the shutter speed ranges from 1/500th of a second to 1 seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since the Mamiya does not have an internal light meter there is no need for an '''ISO''' setting. The camera does however allow you to set the ISO of the film you are using on the dial configuration on the right side of the camera. This does not effect the performance of the camera at all but simply serves as a reminder for the kind of film you are shooting. Be sure to also check out a light meter from Media Loan when checking out a medium format camera.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like the Bronica, most of Media Loan's Mamiyas feature waist-level viewfinders although some of them come with prism viewfinders. You can request either when checking one out. Also like the Bronica, the Mamiya has a magnifier seated within the focusing hood that can be expanded for critical focusing. To '''focus''' the camera, the Mamiya uses bellows that bring the lens closer or farther from the film plane. The lens is a fixed piece of glass and does not focus internally. To adjust the bellows and focus your image, twist either of the large black knobs on the bottom front of the camera. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After your film has been advanced by turning the crank clockwise, the camera is ready to '''take a picture'''. There are two ways to release the shutter. The first is a silver button on the front of the camera in the bottom left corner. A cable release can also be screwed in here. The second way is with the slide mechanism on the right side of the camera. There is a small black lever for your thumb. Slide this downward to release the shutter. As the Mamiyas are quite old, not all of the cameras are able to be fired with either method. Some can only use one or the other and this will be indicated by a note on the camera. Advance the film after each exposure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a shutter lock on the slide mechanism that can be pushed to the &amp;quot;L&amp;quot; position. This prevents both shutter releases from being able to move and is thus useful to use when transporting the camera or arranging your shot. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To take take a picture using '''multiple exposures''', there is a dial next to the film advance crank that has the option of either &amp;quot;SINGLE&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;MULTI&amp;quot;. Turn this to &amp;quot;MULTI&amp;quot; to be able to exposure a frame multiple times without needing to advance the film. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Unloading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
After twelve frames are exposed, continue to turn the winding crank until there is no more tension on the advance crank. At this point, the protective paper of the film should be rolled up around the take up spool. When unloading the film, keep the spool rolled and hold the film tightly to prevent light exposure. Lick or peel the tab on the film and wrap it firmly around the exposed film. Close the camera back.&lt;br /&gt;
==== Using a Flash ====&lt;br /&gt;
To synchronize a flash with the Mamiya, switch the Synchro Selector MX Switch to “X”.  You will need to check out a Vivitar flash and a flash sync cable.  Because the Vivitar flash was not designed to be used with the Mamiya, it will not properly mount on the hot shoe. Therefore, you’ll need to hold it while taking your picture. The Seagull and the Kalimar should not require a sync cable as they can mount onto the hot shoe.&lt;br /&gt;
Caution: Avoid moving the self-timer while the flash sync is set at “M”.  It may cause damage to the self-timer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Linkee14</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Bronica_magnifier2.JPG&amp;diff=36372</id>
		<title>File:Bronica magnifier2.JPG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Bronica_magnifier2.JPG&amp;diff=36372"/>
				<updated>2018-01-19T02:17:57Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Linkee14: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Linkee14</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Bronica_magnifier.JPG&amp;diff=36371</id>
		<title>File:Bronica magnifier.JPG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Bronica_magnifier.JPG&amp;diff=36371"/>
				<updated>2018-01-19T02:16:37Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Linkee14: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Linkee14</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Bronica_viewfinder.JPG&amp;diff=36370</id>
		<title>File:Bronica viewfinder.JPG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Bronica_viewfinder.JPG&amp;diff=36370"/>
				<updated>2018-01-19T02:16:10Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Linkee14: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Linkee14</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Cartridge_doors.jpg&amp;diff=36369</id>
		<title>File:Cartridge doors.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Cartridge_doors.jpg&amp;diff=36369"/>
				<updated>2018-01-19T02:13:16Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Linkee14: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Linkee14</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Bronica_cartridge.jpg&amp;diff=36368</id>
		<title>File:Bronica cartridge.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Bronica_cartridge.jpg&amp;diff=36368"/>
				<updated>2018-01-19T02:06:53Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Linkee14: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Linkee14</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Bronica_cartridge_release.jpg&amp;diff=36367</id>
		<title>File:Bronica cartridge release.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Bronica_cartridge_release.jpg&amp;diff=36367"/>
				<updated>2018-01-19T02:06:10Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Linkee14: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Linkee14</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Medium_Format_Cameras_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=36366</id>
		<title>Medium Format Cameras Gear Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Medium_Format_Cameras_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=36366"/>
				<updated>2018-01-19T01:56:42Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Linkee14: /* Loading Film */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:MediumFormat-top-large.jpg|centre|800x800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
'''A proficiency test is required to check out these cameras.''' Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide and complete the written portion of the [[Medium Format Cameras Proficiency Test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. (You must already be proficient in the 35mm manual camera before obtaining this proficiency.) Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Introduction to Medium Format ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Medium Format vs. 35mm ====&lt;br /&gt;
This is an instructional guide to the medium format film&lt;br /&gt;
cameras available at Media Loan. It will cover a brief introduction to medium&lt;br /&gt;
format photography and then go through the operating steps for each of our&lt;br /&gt;
models. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When talking about film photography, there are three main&lt;br /&gt;
types of film, or formats: 35mm, medium format, and large format. With medium&lt;br /&gt;
and large format, the frame size on the film is much larger than 35mm film and yields significantly more detail and the ability to be printed at very large sizes. In essence, it&lt;br /&gt;
is a question of quality. The size and shape of the actual frame is variable&lt;br /&gt;
depending on the camera (whether your picture is a square, rectangle, skinny&lt;br /&gt;
rectangle, etc.) The size of the frame is often indicated in the name of the&lt;br /&gt;
camera, like the Pentax 6x7 whose frame dimensions are 6cm by 7cm. With 35mm&lt;br /&gt;
photography the size of the frame is always 35mm across regardless of the&lt;br /&gt;
camera used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Medium format film comes wrapped around a plastic spool with&lt;br /&gt;
light-safe black paper layered around the film itself. There is no metal&lt;br /&gt;
canister like with 35mm film. Additionally, when there are no more exposures&lt;br /&gt;
left on the roll, medium format film is not rewound back on to the spool but is&lt;br /&gt;
transferred to another take-up spool on the other side of the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of medium format film, 120 and 220. The&lt;br /&gt;
film is exactly the same except that 220 film contains twice the amount of&lt;br /&gt;
exposures as 120. However, most medium format cameras can shoot only one or the&lt;br /&gt;
other. The Pentax 6x7 and the Mamiya cameras have the ability to shoot both but the camera needs to be adjusted&lt;br /&gt;
to the right setting prior to loading the film. 120 film is the most common and&lt;br /&gt;
allows for 10-12 exposures depending on the camera’s aspect ratio. Keep in mind that not all photo labs can process 220 film.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Tools Required ====&lt;br /&gt;
In order to shoot on a medium format camera, you will need some&lt;br /&gt;
accessories. Some are optional while others are not. The essentials include an&lt;br /&gt;
'''empty film spool''' that your exposed film will be transferred on to (there should&lt;br /&gt;
already be one in the camera from the previous user. If there isn’t ask a Media&lt;br /&gt;
Loan staff member to give you one.) You will also need a '''light meter''' as most of our medium&lt;br /&gt;
format cameras do not have built in meters.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Refer&lt;br /&gt;
to [http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/Light_Meters_Quick_Guide Media Loan’s operating guide for light meters] to find out how to use what&lt;br /&gt;
might be called your medium format camera’s best friend.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other accessories include tripods, cable releases, and&lt;br /&gt;
flashes. If using a flash, remember to also pick up a flash sync cable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Precautions ====&lt;br /&gt;
These cameras are old, expensive, and used by many students. Please give them the respect they deserve. Before handling a camera, be&lt;br /&gt;
aware of what can potentially damage it and what improper usage looks like. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some general rules for these cameras are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
Do not expose them to water or moisture. They&lt;br /&gt;
are not weather proof.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
Do not leave in excessive heat, like in a car.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
Do not leave in excessive cold, like the&lt;br /&gt;
freezer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
Do not try to force any mechanism on the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
You’re probably doing it wrong if it feels like a lot of force.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
Do not remove the prism viewfinder or the lens. This will&lt;br /&gt;
get dust inside the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
NEVER LEAVE ANYTHING FROM MEDIA LOAN IN YOUR&lt;br /&gt;
CAR!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
As with all Media Loan equipment, you are 100% financially&lt;br /&gt;
responsibly for any damage and repairs done to the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Pentax-top.jpg|right|frameless]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pentax 6X7 ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Pentax 6x7 is perhaps the easiest to use of&lt;br /&gt;
all our medium format cameras as it most resembles the shape and operation&lt;br /&gt;
of a 35mm camera. It is a single lens reflex (SLR) camera meaning that what you see&lt;br /&gt;
through the viewfinder is the actual image that will appear on the film. This&lt;br /&gt;
camera can shoot both 120 and 220 film. You will not be able to release the&lt;br /&gt;
shutter until there is film loaded    &lt;br /&gt;
==== Before Loading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:IMG 3315.JPG|thumb|150x150px|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
Firstly, be sure that the wooden handle grip is screwed on tight. All of the camera’s weight rests on this handle.[[File:Pentax film type.jpg|thumb|150x150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Then you need to set&lt;br /&gt;
the film type you are working with, either 120 or 220. There are two places&lt;br /&gt;
that need to be adjusted for this. If you’re holding the camera like you would&lt;br /&gt;
to shoot, the first is on the right side of the camera. [[File:Pentax Pressure Plate.jpg|thumb|150x150px|left]]There is a dial that&lt;br /&gt;
lets your choose between the two. You will need a quarter or a strong finger&lt;br /&gt;
nail to move it. The second adjustment is found on the inside of the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
Open the camera by pulling down on the silver release on the bottom left side&lt;br /&gt;
of the camera. Notice the black speckled pressure plate on the door. Following&lt;br /&gt;
the direction of the arrows there, gently push the pressure plate down and to&lt;br /&gt;
the side that corresponds to your film type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Loading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Pentax back cover.jpg|left|thumb|150x150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Pentax locks.jpg|thumb|150x150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
It is best to do this while sitting as these cameras do not come with neck straps. First, open the back of&lt;br /&gt;
the camera if it is not already open from the previous step. On the bottom of&lt;br /&gt;
the camera are two silver dials that hold the film spools in place. Fold out their handles and turn these&lt;br /&gt;
counter-clockwise and pull them up until the stay put.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Pentax correct.jpg|right|150x150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure your empty take-up spool is on the right side. If there is&lt;br /&gt;
no spool in the camera, ask a Media Loan or Photoland staff to give you one.&lt;br /&gt;
(It is common medium format etiquette to leave your old spool in the camera&lt;br /&gt;
when you’re done using it as it is not needed for developing.) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like with 35mm film, the Pentax 6x7 needs to be loaded&lt;br /&gt;
in a “up and over” style and not “down and under.”            &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Pentax wrong.jpg|right|150x150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
After you’ve aligned the cross in the top of the film spool&lt;br /&gt;
with the notch in the camera, close the silver dials on the bottom of the&lt;br /&gt;
camera. Now pull the film across to the right side of the camera and thread the&lt;br /&gt;
film into the take-up spool just as you would with 35mm film. Use the crank lever to advance the film&lt;br /&gt;
and stop when the arrows on the film paper line up with the arrow on the inside&lt;br /&gt;
of the camera.            &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Close the back of the camera and advance the&lt;br /&gt;
film until “0” is line up with the red dot in the frame counter. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Exposing, Focusing, &amp;amp; Taking a Picture ====&lt;br /&gt;
The '''shutter speed''' is set by the dial on the top left side&lt;br /&gt;
of the camera. The current setting is indicated by whatever number is next to the&lt;br /&gt;
small red LED just to the right of the dial. Since there is no built in light&lt;br /&gt;
meter on this camera, there is no need to set the '''ISO''' for whatever film you are&lt;br /&gt;
using. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If using a flash, you must use a shutter speed on this&lt;br /&gt;
camera of 1/30&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;th&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; of slower. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to do a timed exposure longer than one second&lt;br /&gt;
and you don’t want to keep you finger on the shutter as the “Bulb”&lt;br /&gt;
setting would allow, rotate the shutter speed dial to anywhere between the red “X” and “1000.”&lt;br /&gt;
Now, releasing the shutter will keep it open until you rotate the shutter speed&lt;br /&gt;
dial back to “X”. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The '''aperture''' ring is located on the lens. This is the ring&lt;br /&gt;
closest to the body of the camera and ranges from f/2.4 to f/22. The aperture&lt;br /&gt;
ring will be your primary tool for exposing. Also located on the lens is an&lt;br /&gt;
aperture preview mechanism. This allows you get see your depth of field before&lt;br /&gt;
actually taking a picture. You can lock this switch in &amp;quot;AUTO&amp;quot; mode so&lt;br /&gt;
that you will always be previewing your aperture. To do this, slide the switch&lt;br /&gt;
to &amp;quot;AUTO&amp;quot; and push down. To release it back to manual, push down on the other side of&lt;br /&gt;
the switch. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To focus, simply look through the viewfinder and adjust the&lt;br /&gt;
focus ring until the split viewfinder is even and the image looks crisp.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To release the shutter and take a picture, first crank the film advance level with your right thumb and smoothly and firmly depress the silver button next to the crank.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A cable release can be attached by screwing one into the shutter release button just as with Media Loan's 35mm Pentax K-1000 cameras.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Pentax 6x7 can not take multiple exposure pictures.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Unloading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once all of the frames are exposed you’ll want to unload&lt;br /&gt;
your film. When you’re ready to do this, wind the crank a few more times until&lt;br /&gt;
there is no more tension in the crank lever. By now the protective light-safe&lt;br /&gt;
paper should be covering the film and totally wrapped around the spool.&lt;br /&gt;
Unfasten the silver dials just like when loading film. Keeping a firm grip on the film so that it doesn't unroll,&lt;br /&gt;
lick or peel off the sticky tape on the roll and make sure it is securely attached to the&lt;br /&gt;
spool. Close everything back up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Using a Flash ====&lt;br /&gt;
To use a flash with the Pentax 6x7, first attach the flash to the hot shoe mount on the handle. This camera has options for both X-type sync cables and FP-type sync cables. Use only the X-type as plugging an X cable into an FP housing can cause damage. Again, this camera can only use a flash when the shutter speed is set to 1/30th of a second or slower.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Bronica-top2.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bronica ETRS, ETRSI, &amp;amp; SQ-B ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are three different models of the Bronica available at Media Loan: SB-Q, ETRS, and ETRSi. They are very similar in operation except for a few minor things like button placement and the viewfinders and accessories that come with each camera. The aspect ratio that these cameras shoot at is also different. &lt;br /&gt;
* The ETRS and ETRSi have prism viewfinders and are in a 6x6 (square) format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The SB-Q (aka 645) has a wast-level view finder and is in a 6x4.5 (rectangle) format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Bronica begins to feel like a departure from the 35mm cameras. It is essentially a cube with a lens attached. One notices a very different feel when shooting with a Bronica than with the Pentax 6x7. Since a lot of the controls are not in conventional places, it may take some time to get acquainted with this camera. All of the Bronica cameras can only use 120 film. &lt;br /&gt;
==== Loading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Bronica-Loading.gif|right|222x222px]]&lt;br /&gt;
To load film, open the back of the camera by pinching the buttons that lie just under the viewfinder that are indicated by arrows. It is spring loaded and the film cartridge may fall out so be prepared. The outer shell will fold down and then the film cartridge can be removed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Bronica, film moves from top to bottom. This means your new roll of film will be on top and your empty spool on bottom Now that you're holding the film cartridge, notice there are two door flaps on the left side. Using your finger, push them open from the inside out. You will now be able to remove or insert film spools into each slot. Make sure the empty spool is on bottom and the fresh film is on top. Now you will take the film leader and run it over the pressure plate on the opposite side, bringing it down and around to the empty take up spool. A proper loading will have the black side of the paper leader facing outwards over the pressure plate.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, using the manual film advance wheel located on the right side of the cartridge, advance the film until the arrow on the leader aligns with the red arrow on the inside left of the cartridge.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To close the camera, the cartridge must first be aligned properly on the camera body, not inserted into the door. Once the cartridge is in place, close the door. It can be a little tricky to get it perfectly aligned. Do not force anything. If the door won't shut, take the cartridge out and try again. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now wind the film advance lever until it stops moving and the frame counter is at 0. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Waist-level Viewfinder ====&lt;br /&gt;
Many of Media Loan's Bronicas, like the Mamiyas, feature waist-level viewfinders. This is different than a prism viewfinder in which the viewfinder is held up to the eye. Alternatively, waist-level viewfinders are held at the waist and have a &amp;quot;screen&amp;quot; and magnifier for focusing. Most waist-level viewfinders open by simply folding up the top of the camera. Sometimes there is a small latch. There are metal walls that will snap into place once it is open. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To open the magnifier for critical focusing, there is another release latch on the inside of the focusing hood. To close the magnifier, simply move it back into place with your finger, trying not to touch the actual glass.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some of the Bronicas come with prism viewfinders, which you can ask for. Some of the prism viewfinders are electronic and feature an internal light meter. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Exposing, Focusing, &amp;amp; Taking a Picture ====&lt;br /&gt;
To set the '''shutter speed''', there is a dial on the right side of the camera body. The Bronica has a range of shutter speeds from 1/500th of a second to 8 seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The '''aperture''' is set by twisting the aperture ring on the lens and has a range of f/2.4 to f/22.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are using a Bronica with a built in light meter, set the '''ISO''' to match your film speed by twisting the dial on the left of the viewfinder. If it does not have an internal light meter, you do not have to worry about setting your ISO. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To focus, open the magnifier in the focusing hood as described in the previous section. The Bronica's lens functions conveniently like most other camera lenses. Twist the focus ring until your subject comes into focus.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before '''taking a picture''', the film must be advanced. Do this by winding the crank on the right side of the camera. When there is no film loaded in the camera, the crank will spin indefinitely. Once film has been loaded, the crank will stop itself in the correct position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The shutter release button is a black button located on the front of the camera in the bottom left corner. You can attach a cable release by screwing one into the cable release hole on the left side of the camera. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is preferable to take a picture in the steps in order to ensure a focused picture:&lt;br /&gt;
# Advance the film&lt;br /&gt;
# Set your shutter speed and aperture according to your light meter&lt;br /&gt;
# Focus on your subject&lt;br /&gt;
# Depress the shutter release button&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Using a Flash ====&lt;br /&gt;
A flash can be connected using an X-type sync cable. The port for this flash is located on the front side of the camera in the top right corner. When plugging and unplugging a sync cable, always pull gently and straight out. Never use a twisting motion to get it out. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Bronica can conveniently sync with flash at any shutter speed, even at its fastest of 1/500th of a second.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Multiple Exposure ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Bronica cameras can take multiple exposures, exposing a single a single frame an unlimited number of times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do this, first wind the crank to advance the film. There is a small lever next to the crank that needs to be rotated clockwise. A red warning indicator will appear in the viewfinder letting you know that the multiple exposure mode is engaged, however it is always wise to double check that this lever is in the left or counter-clockwise position (single exposure mode) prior to shooting. When the multiple exposure mode is set, the shutter can be cocked with the film advance crank an infinite number of times without actually advancing the film. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Mirror Lockup ====&lt;br /&gt;
The function of a camera's mirror lockup (also abbreviated MLU) is to reduce the potential for motion blur due to the movement of the mirror inside the camera. This movement will potentially effect photographs only when shooting at shutter speeds of 1/60th of a second or slower. Since the mirror that allows viewing and composing through the viewfinder before actually taking a picture is stuck in its upright position, you will no longer be able to use the viewfinder once the MLU function is engaged. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To engage this function on the Bronica, first advance the film with the crank. There is a lever located to the right of the multiple exposure lever. Move this lever counter-clockwise. You will know it is engaged when you can not see anything through the viewfinder. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are three settings for the mirror lockup function. &amp;quot;N&amp;quot; for normal in which the mirror will not lock up, and &amp;quot;S&amp;quot; for single frame and &amp;quot;C&amp;quot; for continuous in which the mirror will be locked up. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are on your last exposure of the roll and the mirror lock up function is still engaged, the shutter will continue to release every 360 degree turn and will not advance the film as would usually happen after the last exposure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Electronic Prism Viewfinder Operation ====&lt;br /&gt;
...&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mamiya-top.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mamiya C330 &amp;amp; C220 ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Mamiya cameras at Media Loan are perhaps the least intuitive to use of the medium format cameras. Learning to use one properly, however, is well worth it for both high quality images and mad style points. Like large format cameras, the Mamiya uses bellows to focus. Instead of adjusting the elements of glass within the lens, like with lenses that can focus internally, bellows physically move the lens farther or closer to the plane of film in order to focus.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Mamiya shoots square frames that are 2 1/4 inch long in each direction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Before Loading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mamiya-Unlocking.gif|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
Like the Pentax 6x7, the Mamiya can shoot with either 120 or 220 film and the camera needs to be adjusted accordingly before loading film. First, adjust the orientation of the pressure plate on the inside of the camera to coincide with the kind of film you are using. To open the back of the camera rotate the silver locking disk at the top of the back side of the camera so that the red dot is pointing up and you can slide the disk in the direction of the arrow. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because the Mamiya uses a twin lens system rather than being an SLR, you will also need to adjust the parallax adjustment to match whatever the focal length of the lens is you are using. This can be set by the outer ring on the main dial on the left side of the camera. Depending on the adjustment made and the distance of the camera from the subject, a bar will appear on the left side of the viewfinder. ''This is important to notice as it indicates the top of the frame and everything above the bar will be cut off on the actual film, even though it is present in the viewfinder.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, because the farther the bellows take the lens away from the film, light is increasingly lost along the way from when it enters the lens to when it reaches the film. Inside the viewfinder, the number that the moving bar lands at indicates in number of stops how much to increase the exposure by in order to compensate for the reduced light. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Loading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
With the neck strap around your neck, open the back of the camera as indicated in the previous section. There are two spool release knobs on the left side of the camera. These pull out and will allow you to remove the film spools. Twist these knobs while pulling to lock them in their disengaged position. On the Mamiya, the film moves from bottom to top, opposite of the Bronica cameras move film. Accordingly, place the empty take up spool in the top compartment. Lock it in place. Then place your fresh roll of film in the bottom compartment and lock it in place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pull out the film leader from the fresh spool and bring it up to the empty spool and thread it into that spool. Once threaded, turn the film advance crank on the right side of the camera clockwise to advance the film leader until the printed arrow on the leader matches up with the start mark on the inside of the camera (located a little lower than half way down on the right side.) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Close the back of the camera by pushing firmly on either side of the silver locking dial. Once closed, turn the locking dial counter-clockwise to lock the back cover in place. Continue to turn the film advance crank clockwise until it won't turn anymore. Your shutter is now cocked and ready to take a picture. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Exposing, Focusing, &amp;amp; Taking a Picture ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Mamiya is slightly different than other cameras in that both the aperture and shutter speed are set on the bottom lens. There are individual rings for each of these settings. The '''aperture''' can be set by moving the little black handle on the left side of the lens and the '''shutter speed''' can be set by twisting the knob with fractions of a second on it. Do not change the shutter speed after the shutter has been cocked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The aperture ranges from f/2.8 to f/22 and the shutter speed ranges from 1/500th of a second to 1 seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since the Mamiya does not have an internal light meter there is no need for an '''ISO''' setting. The camera does however allow you to set the ISO of the film you are using on the dial configuration on the right side of the camera. This does not effect the performance of the camera at all but simply serves as a reminder for the kind of film you are shooting. Be sure to also check out a light meter from Media Loan when checking out a medium format camera.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like the Bronica, most of Media Loan's Mamiyas feature waist-level viewfinders although some of them come with prism viewfinders. You can request either when checking one out. Also like the Bronica, the Mamiya has a magnifier seated within the focusing hood that can be expanded for critical focusing. To '''focus''' the camera, the Mamiya uses bellows that bring the lens closer or farther from the film plane. The lens is a fixed piece of glass and does not focus internally. To adjust the bellows and focus your image, twist either of the large black knobs on the bottom front of the camera. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After your film has been advanced by turning the crank clockwise, the camera is ready to '''take a picture'''. There are two ways to release the shutter. The first is a silver button on the front of the camera in the bottom left corner. A cable release can also be screwed in here. The second way is with the slide mechanism on the right side of the camera. There is a small black lever for your thumb. Slide this downward to release the shutter. As the Mamiyas are quite old, not all of the cameras are able to be fired with either method. Some can only use one or the other and this will be indicated by a note on the camera. Advance the film after each exposure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a shutter lock on the slide mechanism that can be pushed to the &amp;quot;L&amp;quot; position. This prevents both shutter releases from being able to move and is thus useful to use when transporting the camera or arranging your shot. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To take take a picture using '''multiple exposures''', there is a dial next to the film advance crank that has the option of either &amp;quot;SINGLE&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;MULTI&amp;quot;. Turn this to &amp;quot;MULTI&amp;quot; to be able to exposure a frame multiple times without needing to advance the film. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Unloading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
After twelve frames are exposed, continue to turn the winding crank until there is no more tension on the advance crank. At this point, the protective paper of the film should be rolled up around the take up spool. When unloading the film, keep the spool rolled and hold the film tightly to prevent light exposure. Lick or peel the tab on the film and wrap it firmly around the exposed film. Close the camera back.&lt;br /&gt;
==== Using a Flash ====&lt;br /&gt;
To synchronize a flash with the Mamiya, switch the Synchro Selector MX Switch to “X”.  You will need to check out a Vivitar flash and a flash sync cable.  Because the Vivitar flash was not designed to be used with the Mamiya, it will not properly mount on the hot shoe. Therefore, you’ll need to hold it while taking your picture. The Seagull and the Kalimar should not require a sync cable as they can mount onto the hot shoe.&lt;br /&gt;
Caution: Avoid moving the self-timer while the flash sync is set at “M”.  It may cause damage to the self-timer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Linkee14</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Pentax_correct.jpg&amp;diff=36365</id>
		<title>File:Pentax correct.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Pentax_correct.jpg&amp;diff=36365"/>
				<updated>2018-01-19T01:53:57Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Linkee14: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Linkee14</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Pentax_wrong.jpg&amp;diff=36364</id>
		<title>File:Pentax wrong.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Pentax_wrong.jpg&amp;diff=36364"/>
				<updated>2018-01-19T01:53:39Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Linkee14: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Linkee14</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Medium_Format_Cameras_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=36358</id>
		<title>Medium Format Cameras Gear Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Medium_Format_Cameras_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=36358"/>
				<updated>2018-01-18T13:49:22Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Linkee14: /* Before Loading Film */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:MediumFormat-top-large.jpg|centre|800x800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
'''A proficiency test is required to check out these cameras.''' Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide and complete the written portion of the [[Medium Format Cameras Proficiency Test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. (You must already be proficient in the 35mm manual camera before obtaining this proficiency.) Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Introduction to Medium Format ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Medium Format vs. 35mm ====&lt;br /&gt;
This is an instructional guide to the medium format film&lt;br /&gt;
cameras available at Media Loan. It will cover a brief introduction to medium&lt;br /&gt;
format photography and then go through the operating steps for each of our&lt;br /&gt;
models. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When talking about film photography, there are three main&lt;br /&gt;
types of film, or formats: 35mm, medium format, and large format. With medium&lt;br /&gt;
and large format, the frame size on the film is much larger than 35mm film and yields significantly more detail and the ability to be printed at very large sizes. In essence, it&lt;br /&gt;
is a question of quality. The size and shape of the actual frame is variable&lt;br /&gt;
depending on the camera (whether your picture is a square, rectangle, skinny&lt;br /&gt;
rectangle, etc.) The size of the frame is often indicated in the name of the&lt;br /&gt;
camera, like the Pentax 6x7 whose frame dimensions are 6cm by 7cm. With 35mm&lt;br /&gt;
photography the size of the frame is always 35mm across regardless of the&lt;br /&gt;
camera used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Medium format film comes wrapped around a plastic spool with&lt;br /&gt;
light-safe black paper layered around the film itself. There is no metal&lt;br /&gt;
canister like with 35mm film. Additionally, when there are no more exposures&lt;br /&gt;
left on the roll, medium format film is not rewound back on to the spool but is&lt;br /&gt;
transferred to another take-up spool on the other side of the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of medium format film, 120 and 220. The&lt;br /&gt;
film is exactly the same except that 220 film contains twice the amount of&lt;br /&gt;
exposures as 120. However, most medium format cameras can shoot only one or the&lt;br /&gt;
other. The Pentax 6x7 and the Mamiya cameras have the ability to shoot both but the camera needs to be adjusted&lt;br /&gt;
to the right setting prior to loading the film. 120 film is the most common and&lt;br /&gt;
allows for 10-12 exposures depending on the camera’s aspect ratio. Keep in mind that not all photo labs can process 220 film.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Tools Required ====&lt;br /&gt;
In order to shoot on a medium format camera, you will need some&lt;br /&gt;
accessories. Some are optional while others are not. The essentials include an&lt;br /&gt;
'''empty film spool''' that your exposed film will be transferred on to (there should&lt;br /&gt;
already be one in the camera from the previous user. If there isn’t ask a Media&lt;br /&gt;
Loan staff member to give you one.) You will also need a '''light meter''' as most of our medium&lt;br /&gt;
format cameras do not have built in meters.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Refer&lt;br /&gt;
to [http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/Light_Meters_Quick_Guide Media Loan’s operating guide for light meters] to find out how to use what&lt;br /&gt;
might be called your medium format camera’s best friend.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other accessories include tripods, cable releases, and&lt;br /&gt;
flashes. If using a flash, remember to also pick up a flash sync cable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Precautions ====&lt;br /&gt;
These cameras are old, expensive, and used by many students. Please give them the respect they deserve. Before handling a camera, be&lt;br /&gt;
aware of what can potentially damage it and what improper usage looks like. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some general rules for these cameras are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
Do not expose them to water or moisture. They&lt;br /&gt;
are not weather proof.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
Do not leave in excessive heat, like in a car.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
Do not leave in excessive cold, like the&lt;br /&gt;
freezer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
Do not try to force any mechanism on the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
You’re probably doing it wrong if it feels like a lot of force.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
Do not remove the prism viewfinder or the lens. This will&lt;br /&gt;
get dust inside the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
NEVER LEAVE ANYTHING FROM MEDIA LOAN IN YOUR&lt;br /&gt;
CAR!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
As with all Media Loan equipment, you are 100% financially&lt;br /&gt;
responsibly for any damage and repairs done to the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Pentax-top.jpg|right|frameless]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pentax 6X7 ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Pentax 6x7 is perhaps the easiest to use of&lt;br /&gt;
all our medium format cameras as it most resembles the shape and operation&lt;br /&gt;
of a 35mm camera. It is a single lens reflex (SLR) camera meaning that what you see&lt;br /&gt;
through the viewfinder is the actual image that will appear on the film. This&lt;br /&gt;
camera can shoot both 120 and 220 film. You will not be able to release the&lt;br /&gt;
shutter until there is film loaded    &lt;br /&gt;
==== Before Loading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:IMG 3315.JPG|thumb|150x150px|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
Firstly, be sure that the wooden handle grip is screwed on tight. All of the camera’s weight rests on this handle.[[File:Pentax film type.jpg|thumb|150x150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Then you need to set&lt;br /&gt;
the film type you are working with, either 120 or 220. There are two places&lt;br /&gt;
that need to be adjusted for this. If you’re holding the camera like you would&lt;br /&gt;
to shoot, the first is on the right side of the camera. [[File:Pentax Pressure Plate.jpg|thumb|150x150px|left]]There is a dial that&lt;br /&gt;
lets your choose between the two. You will need a quarter or a strong finger&lt;br /&gt;
nail to move it. The second adjustment is found on the inside of the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
Open the camera by pulling down on the silver release on the bottom left side&lt;br /&gt;
of the camera. Notice the black speckled pressure plate on the door. Following&lt;br /&gt;
the direction of the arrows there, gently push the pressure plate down and to&lt;br /&gt;
the side that corresponds to your film type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Loading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Pentax back cover.jpg|left|thumb|200x200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Pentax locks.jpg|thumb|150x150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
It is best to do this while sitting as these cameras do not come with neck straps. First, open the back of&lt;br /&gt;
the camera if it is not already open from the previous step. On the bottom of&lt;br /&gt;
the camera are two silver dials that hold the film spools in place. Fold out their handles and turn these&lt;br /&gt;
counter-clockwise and pull them up until the stay put.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure your empty take-up spool is on the right side. If there is&lt;br /&gt;
no spool in the camera, ask a Media Loan or Photoland staff to give you one.&lt;br /&gt;
(It is common medium format etiquette to leave your old spool in the camera&lt;br /&gt;
when you’re done using it as it is not needed for developing.) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like with 35mm film, the Pentax 6x7 needs to be loaded&lt;br /&gt;
in a “up and over” style and not “down and under.”            &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After you’ve aligned the cross in the top of the film spool&lt;br /&gt;
with the notch in the camera, close the silver dials on the bottom of the&lt;br /&gt;
camera. Now pull the film across to the right side of the camera and thread the&lt;br /&gt;
film into the take-up spool just as you would with 35mm film. Use the crank lever to advance the film&lt;br /&gt;
and stop when the arrows on the film paper line up with the arrow on the inside&lt;br /&gt;
of the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Close the back of the camera and advance the&lt;br /&gt;
film until “0” is line up with the red dot in the frame counter. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Exposing, Focusing, &amp;amp; Taking a Picture ====&lt;br /&gt;
The '''shutter speed''' is set by the dial on the top left side&lt;br /&gt;
of the camera. The current setting is indicated by whatever number is next to the&lt;br /&gt;
small red LED just to the right of the dial. Since there is no built in light&lt;br /&gt;
meter on this camera, there is no need to set the '''ISO''' for whatever film you are&lt;br /&gt;
using. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If using a flash, you must use a shutter speed on this&lt;br /&gt;
camera of 1/30&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;th&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; of slower. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to do a timed exposure longer than one second&lt;br /&gt;
and you don’t want to keep you finger on the shutter as the “Bulb”&lt;br /&gt;
setting would allow, rotate the shutter speed dial to anywhere between the red “X” and “1000.”&lt;br /&gt;
Now, releasing the shutter will keep it open until you rotate the shutter speed&lt;br /&gt;
dial back to “X”. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The '''aperture''' ring is located on the lens. This is the ring&lt;br /&gt;
closest to the body of the camera and ranges from f/2.4 to f/22. The aperture&lt;br /&gt;
ring will be your primary tool for exposing. Also located on the lens is an&lt;br /&gt;
aperture preview mechanism. This allows you get see your depth of field before&lt;br /&gt;
actually taking a picture. You can lock this switch in &amp;quot;AUTO&amp;quot; mode so&lt;br /&gt;
that you will always be previewing your aperture. To do this, slide the switch&lt;br /&gt;
to &amp;quot;AUTO&amp;quot; and push down. To release it back to manual, push down on the other side of&lt;br /&gt;
the switch. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To focus, simply look through the viewfinder and adjust the&lt;br /&gt;
focus ring until the split viewfinder is even and the image looks crisp.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To release the shutter and take a picture, first crank the film advance level with your right thumb and smoothly and firmly depress the silver button next to the crank.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A cable release can be attached by screwing one into the shutter release button just as with Media Loan's 35mm Pentax K-1000 cameras.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Pentax 6x7 can not take multiple exposure pictures.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Unloading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once all of the frames are exposed you’ll want to unload&lt;br /&gt;
your film. When you’re ready to do this, wind the crank a few more times until&lt;br /&gt;
there is no more tension in the crank lever. By now the protective light-safe&lt;br /&gt;
paper should be covering the film and totally wrapped around the spool.&lt;br /&gt;
Unfasten the silver dials just like when loading film. Keeping a firm grip on the film so that it doesn't unroll,&lt;br /&gt;
lick or peel off the sticky tape on the roll and make sure it is securely attached to the&lt;br /&gt;
spool. Close everything back up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Using a Flash ====&lt;br /&gt;
To use a flash with the Pentax 6x7, first attach the flash to the hot shoe mount on the handle. This camera has options for both X-type sync cables and FP-type sync cables. Use only the X-type as plugging an X cable into an FP housing can cause damage. Again, this camera can only use a flash when the shutter speed is set to 1/30th of a second or slower.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Bronica-top2.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bronica ETRS, ETRSI, &amp;amp; SQ-B ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are three different models of the Bronica available at Media Loan: SB-Q, ETRS, and ETRSi. They are very similar in operation except for a few minor things like button placement and the viewfinders and accessories that come with each camera. The aspect ratio that these cameras shoot at is also different. &lt;br /&gt;
* The ETRS and ETRSi have prism viewfinders and are in a 6x6 (square) format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The SB-Q (aka 645) has a wast-level view finder and is in a 6x4.5 (rectangle) format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Bronica begins to feel like a departure from the 35mm cameras. It is essentially a cube with a lens attached. One notices a very different feel when shooting with a Bronica than with the Pentax 6x7. Since a lot of the controls are not in conventional places, it may take some time to get acquainted with this camera. All of the Bronica cameras can only use 120 film. &lt;br /&gt;
==== Loading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Bronica-Loading.gif|right|222x222px]]&lt;br /&gt;
To load film, open the back of the camera by pinching the buttons that lie just under the viewfinder that are indicated by arrows. It is spring loaded and the film cartridge may fall out so be prepared. The outer shell will fold down and then the film cartridge can be removed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Bronica, film moves from top to bottom. This means your new roll of film will be on top and your empty spool on bottom Now that you're holding the film cartridge, notice there are two door flaps on the left side. Using your finger, push them open from the inside out. You will now be able to remove or insert film spools into each slot. Make sure the empty spool is on bottom and the fresh film is on top. Now you will take the film leader and run it over the pressure plate on the opposite side, bringing it down and around to the empty take up spool. A proper loading will have the black side of the paper leader facing outwards over the pressure plate.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, using the manual film advance wheel located on the right side of the cartridge, advance the film until the arrow on the leader aligns with the red arrow on the inside left of the cartridge.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To close the camera, the cartridge must first be aligned properly on the camera body, not inserted into the door. Once the cartridge is in place, close the door. It can be a little tricky to get it perfectly aligned. Do not force anything. If the door won't shut, take the cartridge out and try again. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now wind the film advance lever until it stops moving and the frame counter is at 0. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Waist-level Viewfinder ====&lt;br /&gt;
Many of Media Loan's Bronicas, like the Mamiyas, feature waist-level viewfinders. This is different than a prism viewfinder in which the viewfinder is held up to the eye. Alternatively, waist-level viewfinders are held at the waist and have a &amp;quot;screen&amp;quot; and magnifier for focusing. Most waist-level viewfinders open by simply folding up the top of the camera. Sometimes there is a small latch. There are metal walls that will snap into place once it is open. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To open the magnifier for critical focusing, there is another release latch on the inside of the focusing hood. To close the magnifier, simply move it back into place with your finger, trying not to touch the actual glass.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some of the Bronicas come with prism viewfinders, which you can ask for. Some of the prism viewfinders are electronic and feature an internal light meter. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Exposing, Focusing, &amp;amp; Taking a Picture ====&lt;br /&gt;
To set the '''shutter speed''', there is a dial on the right side of the camera body. The Bronica has a range of shutter speeds from 1/500th of a second to 8 seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The '''aperture''' is set by twisting the aperture ring on the lens and has a range of f/2.4 to f/22.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are using a Bronica with a built in light meter, set the '''ISO''' to match your film speed by twisting the dial on the left of the viewfinder. If it does not have an internal light meter, you do not have to worry about setting your ISO. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To focus, open the magnifier in the focusing hood as described in the previous section. The Bronica's lens functions conveniently like most other camera lenses. Twist the focus ring until your subject comes into focus.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before '''taking a picture''', the film must be advanced. Do this by winding the crank on the right side of the camera. When there is no film loaded in the camera, the crank will spin indefinitely. Once film has been loaded, the crank will stop itself in the correct position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The shutter release button is a black button located on the front of the camera in the bottom left corner. You can attach a cable release by screwing one into the cable release hole on the left side of the camera. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is preferable to take a picture in the steps in order to ensure a focused picture:&lt;br /&gt;
# Advance the film&lt;br /&gt;
# Set your shutter speed and aperture according to your light meter&lt;br /&gt;
# Focus on your subject&lt;br /&gt;
# Depress the shutter release button&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Using a Flash ====&lt;br /&gt;
A flash can be connected using an X-type sync cable. The port for this flash is located on the front side of the camera in the top right corner. When plugging and unplugging a sync cable, always pull gently and straight out. Never use a twisting motion to get it out. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Bronica can conveniently sync with flash at any shutter speed, even at its fastest of 1/500th of a second.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Multiple Exposure ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Bronica cameras can take multiple exposures, exposing a single a single frame an unlimited number of times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do this, first wind the crank to advance the film. There is a small lever next to the crank that needs to be rotated clockwise. A red warning indicator will appear in the viewfinder letting you know that the multiple exposure mode is engaged, however it is always wise to double check that this lever is in the left or counter-clockwise position (single exposure mode) prior to shooting. When the multiple exposure mode is set, the shutter can be cocked with the film advance crank an infinite number of times without actually advancing the film. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Mirror Lockup ====&lt;br /&gt;
The function of a camera's mirror lockup (also abbreviated MLU) is to reduce the potential for motion blur due to the movement of the mirror inside the camera. This movement will potentially effect photographs only when shooting at shutter speeds of 1/60th of a second or slower. Since the mirror that allows viewing and composing through the viewfinder before actually taking a picture is stuck in its upright position, you will no longer be able to use the viewfinder once the MLU function is engaged. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To engage this function on the Bronica, first advance the film with the crank. There is a lever located to the right of the multiple exposure lever. Move this lever counter-clockwise. You will know it is engaged when you can not see anything through the viewfinder. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are three settings for the mirror lockup function. &amp;quot;N&amp;quot; for normal in which the mirror will not lock up, and &amp;quot;S&amp;quot; for single frame and &amp;quot;C&amp;quot; for continuous in which the mirror will be locked up. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are on your last exposure of the roll and the mirror lock up function is still engaged, the shutter will continue to release every 360 degree turn and will not advance the film as would usually happen after the last exposure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Electronic Prism Viewfinder Operation ====&lt;br /&gt;
...&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mamiya-top.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mamiya C330 &amp;amp; C220 ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Mamiya cameras at Media Loan are perhaps the least intuitive to use of the medium format cameras. Learning to use one properly, however, is well worth it for both high quality images and mad style points. Like large format cameras, the Mamiya uses bellows to focus. Instead of adjusting the elements of glass within the lens, like with lenses that can focus internally, bellows physically move the lens farther or closer to the plane of film in order to focus.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Mamiya shoots square frames that are 2 1/4 inch long in each direction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Before Loading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mamiya-Unlocking.gif|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
Like the Pentax 6x7, the Mamiya can shoot with either 120 or 220 film and the camera needs to be adjusted accordingly before loading film. First, adjust the orientation of the pressure plate on the inside of the camera to coincide with the kind of film you are using. To open the back of the camera rotate the silver locking disk at the top of the back side of the camera so that the red dot is pointing up and you can slide the disk in the direction of the arrow. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because the Mamiya uses a twin lens system rather than being an SLR, you will also need to adjust the parallax adjustment to match whatever the focal length of the lens is you are using. This can be set by the outer ring on the main dial on the left side of the camera. Depending on the adjustment made and the distance of the camera from the subject, a bar will appear on the left side of the viewfinder. ''This is important to notice as it indicates the top of the frame and everything above the bar will be cut off on the actual film, even though it is present in the viewfinder.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, because the farther the bellows take the lens away from the film, light is increasingly lost along the way from when it enters the lens to when it reaches the film. Inside the viewfinder, the number that the moving bar lands at indicates in number of stops how much to increase the exposure by in order to compensate for the reduced light. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Loading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
With the neck strap around your neck, open the back of the camera as indicated in the previous section. There are two spool release knobs on the left side of the camera. These pull out and will allow you to remove the film spools. Twist these knobs while pulling to lock them in their disengaged position. On the Mamiya, the film moves from bottom to top, opposite of the Bronica cameras move film. Accordingly, place the empty take up spool in the top compartment. Lock it in place. Then place your fresh roll of film in the bottom compartment and lock it in place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pull out the film leader from the fresh spool and bring it up to the empty spool and thread it into that spool. Once threaded, turn the film advance crank on the right side of the camera clockwise to advance the film leader until the printed arrow on the leader matches up with the start mark on the inside of the camera (located a little lower than half way down on the right side.) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Close the back of the camera by pushing firmly on either side of the silver locking dial. Once closed, turn the locking dial counter-clockwise to lock the back cover in place. Continue to turn the film advance crank clockwise until it won't turn anymore. Your shutter is now cocked and ready to take a picture. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Exposing, Focusing, &amp;amp; Taking a Picture ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Mamiya is slightly different than other cameras in that both the aperture and shutter speed are set on the bottom lens. There are individual rings for each of these settings. The '''aperture''' can be set by moving the little black handle on the left side of the lens and the '''shutter speed''' can be set by twisting the knob with fractions of a second on it. Do not change the shutter speed after the shutter has been cocked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The aperture ranges from f/2.8 to f/22 and the shutter speed ranges from 1/500th of a second to 1 seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since the Mamiya does not have an internal light meter there is no need for an '''ISO''' setting. The camera does however allow you to set the ISO of the film you are using on the dial configuration on the right side of the camera. This does not effect the performance of the camera at all but simply serves as a reminder for the kind of film you are shooting. Be sure to also check out a light meter from Media Loan when checking out a medium format camera.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like the Bronica, most of Media Loan's Mamiyas feature waist-level viewfinders although some of them come with prism viewfinders. You can request either when checking one out. Also like the Bronica, the Mamiya has a magnifier seated within the focusing hood that can be expanded for critical focusing. To '''focus''' the camera, the Mamiya uses bellows that bring the lens closer or farther from the film plane. The lens is a fixed piece of glass and does not focus internally. To adjust the bellows and focus your image, twist either of the large black knobs on the bottom front of the camera. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After your film has been advanced by turning the crank clockwise, the camera is ready to '''take a picture'''. There are two ways to release the shutter. The first is a silver button on the front of the camera in the bottom left corner. A cable release can also be screwed in here. The second way is with the slide mechanism on the right side of the camera. There is a small black lever for your thumb. Slide this downward to release the shutter. As the Mamiyas are quite old, not all of the cameras are able to be fired with either method. Some can only use one or the other and this will be indicated by a note on the camera. Advance the film after each exposure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a shutter lock on the slide mechanism that can be pushed to the &amp;quot;L&amp;quot; position. This prevents both shutter releases from being able to move and is thus useful to use when transporting the camera or arranging your shot. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To take take a picture using '''multiple exposures''', there is a dial next to the film advance crank that has the option of either &amp;quot;SINGLE&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;MULTI&amp;quot;. Turn this to &amp;quot;MULTI&amp;quot; to be able to exposure a frame multiple times without needing to advance the film. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Unloading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
After twelve frames are exposed, continue to turn the winding crank until there is no more tension on the advance crank. At this point, the protective paper of the film should be rolled up around the take up spool. When unloading the film, keep the spool rolled and hold the film tightly to prevent light exposure. Lick or peel the tab on the film and wrap it firmly around the exposed film. Close the camera back.&lt;br /&gt;
==== Using a Flash ====&lt;br /&gt;
To synchronize a flash with the Mamiya, switch the Synchro Selector MX Switch to “X”.  You will need to check out a Vivitar flash and a flash sync cable.  Because the Vivitar flash was not designed to be used with the Mamiya, it will not properly mount on the hot shoe. Therefore, you’ll need to hold it while taking your picture. The Seagull and the Kalimar should not require a sync cable as they can mount onto the hot shoe.&lt;br /&gt;
Caution: Avoid moving the self-timer while the flash sync is set at “M”.  It may cause damage to the self-timer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Linkee14</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Pentax_back_cover.jpg&amp;diff=36357</id>
		<title>File:Pentax back cover.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Pentax_back_cover.jpg&amp;diff=36357"/>
				<updated>2018-01-18T13:47:44Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Linkee14: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Linkee14</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Medium_Format_Cameras_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=36356</id>
		<title>Medium Format Cameras Gear Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Medium_Format_Cameras_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=36356"/>
				<updated>2018-01-18T13:43:16Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Linkee14: /* Before Loading Film */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:MediumFormat-top-large.jpg|centre|800x800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
'''A proficiency test is required to check out these cameras.''' Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide and complete the written portion of the [[Medium Format Cameras Proficiency Test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. (You must already be proficient in the 35mm manual camera before obtaining this proficiency.) Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Introduction to Medium Format ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Medium Format vs. 35mm ====&lt;br /&gt;
This is an instructional guide to the medium format film&lt;br /&gt;
cameras available at Media Loan. It will cover a brief introduction to medium&lt;br /&gt;
format photography and then go through the operating steps for each of our&lt;br /&gt;
models. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When talking about film photography, there are three main&lt;br /&gt;
types of film, or formats: 35mm, medium format, and large format. With medium&lt;br /&gt;
and large format, the frame size on the film is much larger than 35mm film and yields significantly more detail and the ability to be printed at very large sizes. In essence, it&lt;br /&gt;
is a question of quality. The size and shape of the actual frame is variable&lt;br /&gt;
depending on the camera (whether your picture is a square, rectangle, skinny&lt;br /&gt;
rectangle, etc.) The size of the frame is often indicated in the name of the&lt;br /&gt;
camera, like the Pentax 6x7 whose frame dimensions are 6cm by 7cm. With 35mm&lt;br /&gt;
photography the size of the frame is always 35mm across regardless of the&lt;br /&gt;
camera used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Medium format film comes wrapped around a plastic spool with&lt;br /&gt;
light-safe black paper layered around the film itself. There is no metal&lt;br /&gt;
canister like with 35mm film. Additionally, when there are no more exposures&lt;br /&gt;
left on the roll, medium format film is not rewound back on to the spool but is&lt;br /&gt;
transferred to another take-up spool on the other side of the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of medium format film, 120 and 220. The&lt;br /&gt;
film is exactly the same except that 220 film contains twice the amount of&lt;br /&gt;
exposures as 120. However, most medium format cameras can shoot only one or the&lt;br /&gt;
other. The Pentax 6x7 and the Mamiya cameras have the ability to shoot both but the camera needs to be adjusted&lt;br /&gt;
to the right setting prior to loading the film. 120 film is the most common and&lt;br /&gt;
allows for 10-12 exposures depending on the camera’s aspect ratio. Keep in mind that not all photo labs can process 220 film.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Tools Required ====&lt;br /&gt;
In order to shoot on a medium format camera, you will need some&lt;br /&gt;
accessories. Some are optional while others are not. The essentials include an&lt;br /&gt;
'''empty film spool''' that your exposed film will be transferred on to (there should&lt;br /&gt;
already be one in the camera from the previous user. If there isn’t ask a Media&lt;br /&gt;
Loan staff member to give you one.) You will also need a '''light meter''' as most of our medium&lt;br /&gt;
format cameras do not have built in meters.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Refer&lt;br /&gt;
to [http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/Light_Meters_Quick_Guide Media Loan’s operating guide for light meters] to find out how to use what&lt;br /&gt;
might be called your medium format camera’s best friend.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other accessories include tripods, cable releases, and&lt;br /&gt;
flashes. If using a flash, remember to also pick up a flash sync cable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Precautions ====&lt;br /&gt;
These cameras are old, expensive, and used by many students. Please give them the respect they deserve. Before handling a camera, be&lt;br /&gt;
aware of what can potentially damage it and what improper usage looks like. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some general rules for these cameras are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
Do not expose them to water or moisture. They&lt;br /&gt;
are not weather proof.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
Do not leave in excessive heat, like in a car.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
Do not leave in excessive cold, like the&lt;br /&gt;
freezer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
Do not try to force any mechanism on the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
You’re probably doing it wrong if it feels like a lot of force.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
Do not remove the prism viewfinder or the lens. This will&lt;br /&gt;
get dust inside the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
NEVER LEAVE ANYTHING FROM MEDIA LOAN IN YOUR&lt;br /&gt;
CAR!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
As with all Media Loan equipment, you are 100% financially&lt;br /&gt;
responsibly for any damage and repairs done to the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Pentax-top.jpg|right|frameless]]&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pentax 6X7 ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Pentax 6x7 is perhaps the easiest to use of&lt;br /&gt;
all our medium format cameras as it most resembles the shape and operation&lt;br /&gt;
of a 35mm camera. It is a single lens reflex (SLR) camera meaning that what you see&lt;br /&gt;
through the viewfinder is the actual image that will appear on the film. This&lt;br /&gt;
camera can shoot both 120 and 220 film. You will not be able to release the&lt;br /&gt;
shutter until there is film loaded    &lt;br /&gt;
==== Before Loading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
Firstly, be sure that the wooden handle grip is screwed on tight. All of the camera’s weight rests on this handle.[[File:IMG 3315.JPG|thumb|150x150px|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Pentax Pressure Plate.jpg|thumb|150x150px]][[File:Pentax film type.jpg|centre|thumb|150x150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Then you need to set&lt;br /&gt;
the film type you are working with, either 120 or 220. There are two places&lt;br /&gt;
that need to be adjusted for this. If you’re holding the camera like you would&lt;br /&gt;
to shoot, the first is on the right side of the camera. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a dial that&lt;br /&gt;
lets your choose between the two. You will need a quarter or a strong finger&lt;br /&gt;
nail to move it. The second adjustment is found on the inside of the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
Open the camera by pulling down on the silver release on the bottom left side&lt;br /&gt;
of the camera. Notice the black speckled pressure plate on the door. Following&lt;br /&gt;
the direction of the arrows there, gently push the pressure plate down and to&lt;br /&gt;
the side that corresponds to your film type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Loading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
It is best to do this while sitting as these cameras do not come with neck straps. First, open the back of&lt;br /&gt;
the camera if it is not already open from the previous step. On the bottom of&lt;br /&gt;
the camera are two silver dials that hold the film spools in place. Fold out their handles and turn these&lt;br /&gt;
counter-clockwise and pull them up until the stay put.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure your empty take-up spool is on the right side. If there is&lt;br /&gt;
no spool in the camera, ask a Media Loan or Photoland staff to give you one.&lt;br /&gt;
(It is common medium format etiquette to leave your old spool in the camera&lt;br /&gt;
when you’re done using it as it is not needed for developing.) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like with 35mm film, the Pentax 6x7 needs to be loaded&lt;br /&gt;
in a “up and over” style and not “down and under.”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
            INSERT&lt;br /&gt;
EXAMPLE PHOTO&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After you’ve aligned the cross in the top of the film spool&lt;br /&gt;
with the notch in the camera, close the silver dials on the bottom of the&lt;br /&gt;
camera. Now pull the film across to the right side of the camera and thread the&lt;br /&gt;
film into the take-up spool just as you would with 35mm film. Use the crank lever to advance the film&lt;br /&gt;
and stop when the arrows on the film paper line up with the arrow on the inside&lt;br /&gt;
of the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Close the back of the camera and advance the&lt;br /&gt;
film until “0” is line up with the red dot in the frame counter. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Exposing, Focusing, &amp;amp; Taking a Picture ====&lt;br /&gt;
The '''shutter speed''' is set by the dial on the top left side&lt;br /&gt;
of the camera. The current setting is indicated by whatever number is next to the&lt;br /&gt;
small red LED just to the right of the dial. Since there is no built in light&lt;br /&gt;
meter on this camera, there is no need to set the '''ISO''' for whatever film you are&lt;br /&gt;
using. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If using a flash, you must use a shutter speed on this&lt;br /&gt;
camera of 1/30&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;th&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; of slower. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to do a timed exposure longer than one second&lt;br /&gt;
and you don’t want to keep you finger on the shutter as the “Bulb”&lt;br /&gt;
setting would allow, rotate the shutter speed dial to anywhere between the red “X” and “1000.”&lt;br /&gt;
Now, releasing the shutter will keep it open until you rotate the shutter speed&lt;br /&gt;
dial back to “X”. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The '''aperture''' ring is located on the lens. This is the ring&lt;br /&gt;
closest to the body of the camera and ranges from f/2.4 to f/22. The aperture&lt;br /&gt;
ring will be your primary tool for exposing. Also located on the lens is an&lt;br /&gt;
aperture preview mechanism. This allows you get see your depth of field before&lt;br /&gt;
actually taking a picture. You can lock this switch in &amp;quot;AUTO&amp;quot; mode so&lt;br /&gt;
that you will always be previewing your aperture. To do this, slide the switch&lt;br /&gt;
to &amp;quot;AUTO&amp;quot; and push down. To release it back to manual, push down on the other side of&lt;br /&gt;
the switch. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To focus, simply look through the viewfinder and adjust the&lt;br /&gt;
focus ring until the split viewfinder is even and the image looks crisp.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To release the shutter and take a picture, first crank the film advance level with your right thumb and smoothly and firmly depress the silver button next to the crank.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A cable release can be attached by screwing one into the shutter release button just as with Media Loan's 35mm Pentax K-1000 cameras.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Pentax 6x7 can not take multiple exposure pictures.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Unloading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once all of the frames are exposed you’ll want to unload&lt;br /&gt;
your film. When you’re ready to do this, wind the crank a few more times until&lt;br /&gt;
there is no more tension in the crank lever. By now the protective light-safe&lt;br /&gt;
paper should be covering the film and totally wrapped around the spool.&lt;br /&gt;
Unfasten the silver dials just like when loading film. Keeping a firm grip on the film so that it doesn't unroll,&lt;br /&gt;
lick or peel off the sticky tape on the roll and make sure it is securely attached to the&lt;br /&gt;
spool. Close everything back up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Using a Flash ====&lt;br /&gt;
To use a flash with the Pentax 6x7, first attach the flash to the hot shoe mount on the handle. This camera has options for both X-type sync cables and FP-type sync cables. Use only the X-type as plugging an X cable into an FP housing can cause damage. Again, this camera can only use a flash when the shutter speed is set to 1/30th of a second or slower.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Bronica-top2.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bronica ETRS, ETRSI, &amp;amp; SQ-B ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are three different models of the Bronica available at Media Loan: SB-Q, ETRS, and ETRSi. They are very similar in operation except for a few minor things like button placement and the viewfinders and accessories that come with each camera. The aspect ratio that these cameras shoot at is also different. &lt;br /&gt;
* The ETRS and ETRSi have prism viewfinders and are in a 6x6 (square) format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The SB-Q (aka 645) has a wast-level view finder and is in a 6x4.5 (rectangle) format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Bronica begins to feel like a departure from the 35mm cameras. It is essentially a cube with a lens attached. One notices a very different feel when shooting with a Bronica than with the Pentax 6x7. Since a lot of the controls are not in conventional places, it may take some time to get acquainted with this camera. All of the Bronica cameras can only use 120 film. &lt;br /&gt;
==== Loading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Bronica-Loading.gif|right|222x222px]]&lt;br /&gt;
To load film, open the back of the camera by pinching the buttons that lie just under the viewfinder that are indicated by arrows. It is spring loaded and the film cartridge may fall out so be prepared. The outer shell will fold down and then the film cartridge can be removed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Bronica, film moves from top to bottom. This means your new roll of film will be on top and your empty spool on bottom Now that you're holding the film cartridge, notice there are two door flaps on the left side. Using your finger, push them open from the inside out. You will now be able to remove or insert film spools into each slot. Make sure the empty spool is on bottom and the fresh film is on top. Now you will take the film leader and run it over the pressure plate on the opposite side, bringing it down and around to the empty take up spool. A proper loading will have the black side of the paper leader facing outwards over the pressure plate.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, using the manual film advance wheel located on the right side of the cartridge, advance the film until the arrow on the leader aligns with the red arrow on the inside left of the cartridge.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To close the camera, the cartridge must first be aligned properly on the camera body, not inserted into the door. Once the cartridge is in place, close the door. It can be a little tricky to get it perfectly aligned. Do not force anything. If the door won't shut, take the cartridge out and try again. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now wind the film advance lever until it stops moving and the frame counter is at 0. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Waist-level Viewfinder ====&lt;br /&gt;
Many of Media Loan's Bronicas, like the Mamiyas, feature waist-level viewfinders. This is different than a prism viewfinder in which the viewfinder is held up to the eye. Alternatively, waist-level viewfinders are held at the waist and have a &amp;quot;screen&amp;quot; and magnifier for focusing. Most waist-level viewfinders open by simply folding up the top of the camera. Sometimes there is a small latch. There are metal walls that will snap into place once it is open. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To open the magnifier for critical focusing, there is another release latch on the inside of the focusing hood. To close the magnifier, simply move it back into place with your finger, trying not to touch the actual glass.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some of the Bronicas come with prism viewfinders, which you can ask for. Some of the prism viewfinders are electronic and feature an internal light meter. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Exposing, Focusing, &amp;amp; Taking a Picture ====&lt;br /&gt;
To set the '''shutter speed''', there is a dial on the right side of the camera body. The Bronica has a range of shutter speeds from 1/500th of a second to 8 seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The '''aperture''' is set by twisting the aperture ring on the lens and has a range of f/2.4 to f/22.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are using a Bronica with a built in light meter, set the '''ISO''' to match your film speed by twisting the dial on the left of the viewfinder. If it does not have an internal light meter, you do not have to worry about setting your ISO. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To focus, open the magnifier in the focusing hood as described in the previous section. The Bronica's lens functions conveniently like most other camera lenses. Twist the focus ring until your subject comes into focus.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before '''taking a picture''', the film must be advanced. Do this by winding the crank on the right side of the camera. When there is no film loaded in the camera, the crank will spin indefinitely. Once film has been loaded, the crank will stop itself in the correct position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The shutter release button is a black button located on the front of the camera in the bottom left corner. You can attach a cable release by screwing one into the cable release hole on the left side of the camera. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is preferable to take a picture in the steps in order to ensure a focused picture:&lt;br /&gt;
# Advance the film&lt;br /&gt;
# Set your shutter speed and aperture according to your light meter&lt;br /&gt;
# Focus on your subject&lt;br /&gt;
# Depress the shutter release button&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Using a Flash ====&lt;br /&gt;
A flash can be connected using an X-type sync cable. The port for this flash is located on the front side of the camera in the top right corner. When plugging and unplugging a sync cable, always pull gently and straight out. Never use a twisting motion to get it out. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Bronica can conveniently sync with flash at any shutter speed, even at its fastest of 1/500th of a second.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Multiple Exposure ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Bronica cameras can take multiple exposures, exposing a single a single frame an unlimited number of times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do this, first wind the crank to advance the film. There is a small lever next to the crank that needs to be rotated clockwise. A red warning indicator will appear in the viewfinder letting you know that the multiple exposure mode is engaged, however it is always wise to double check that this lever is in the left or counter-clockwise position (single exposure mode) prior to shooting. When the multiple exposure mode is set, the shutter can be cocked with the film advance crank an infinite number of times without actually advancing the film. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Mirror Lockup ====&lt;br /&gt;
The function of a camera's mirror lockup (also abbreviated MLU) is to reduce the potential for motion blur due to the movement of the mirror inside the camera. This movement will potentially effect photographs only when shooting at shutter speeds of 1/60th of a second or slower. Since the mirror that allows viewing and composing through the viewfinder before actually taking a picture is stuck in its upright position, you will no longer be able to use the viewfinder once the MLU function is engaged. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To engage this function on the Bronica, first advance the film with the crank. There is a lever located to the right of the multiple exposure lever. Move this lever counter-clockwise. You will know it is engaged when you can not see anything through the viewfinder. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are three settings for the mirror lockup function. &amp;quot;N&amp;quot; for normal in which the mirror will not lock up, and &amp;quot;S&amp;quot; for single frame and &amp;quot;C&amp;quot; for continuous in which the mirror will be locked up. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are on your last exposure of the roll and the mirror lock up function is still engaged, the shutter will continue to release every 360 degree turn and will not advance the film as would usually happen after the last exposure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Electronic Prism Viewfinder Operation ====&lt;br /&gt;
...&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mamiya-top.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mamiya C330 &amp;amp; C220 ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Mamiya cameras at Media Loan are perhaps the least intuitive to use of the medium format cameras. Learning to use one properly, however, is well worth it for both high quality images and mad style points. Like large format cameras, the Mamiya uses bellows to focus. Instead of adjusting the elements of glass within the lens, like with lenses that can focus internally, bellows physically move the lens farther or closer to the plane of film in order to focus.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Mamiya shoots square frames that are 2 1/4 inch long in each direction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Before Loading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mamiya-Unlocking.gif|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
Like the Pentax 6x7, the Mamiya can shoot with either 120 or 220 film and the camera needs to be adjusted accordingly before loading film. First, adjust the orientation of the pressure plate on the inside of the camera to coincide with the kind of film you are using. To open the back of the camera rotate the silver locking disk at the top of the back side of the camera so that the red dot is pointing up and you can slide the disk in the direction of the arrow. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because the Mamiya uses a twin lens system rather than being an SLR, you will also need to adjust the parallax adjustment to match whatever the focal length of the lens is you are using. This can be set by the outer ring on the main dial on the left side of the camera. Depending on the adjustment made and the distance of the camera from the subject, a bar will appear on the left side of the viewfinder. ''This is important to notice as it indicates the top of the frame and everything above the bar will be cut off on the actual film, even though it is present in the viewfinder.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, because the farther the bellows take the lens away from the film, light is increasingly lost along the way from when it enters the lens to when it reaches the film. Inside the viewfinder, the number that the moving bar lands at indicates in number of stops how much to increase the exposure by in order to compensate for the reduced light. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Loading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
With the neck strap around your neck, open the back of the camera as indicated in the previous section. There are two spool release knobs on the left side of the camera. These pull out and will allow you to remove the film spools. Twist these knobs while pulling to lock them in their disengaged position. On the Mamiya, the film moves from bottom to top, opposite of the Bronica cameras move film. Accordingly, place the empty take up spool in the top compartment. Lock it in place. Then place your fresh roll of film in the bottom compartment and lock it in place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pull out the film leader from the fresh spool and bring it up to the empty spool and thread it into that spool. Once threaded, turn the film advance crank on the right side of the camera clockwise to advance the film leader until the printed arrow on the leader matches up with the start mark on the inside of the camera (located a little lower than half way down on the right side.) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Close the back of the camera by pushing firmly on either side of the silver locking dial. Once closed, turn the locking dial counter-clockwise to lock the back cover in place. Continue to turn the film advance crank clockwise until it won't turn anymore. Your shutter is now cocked and ready to take a picture. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Exposing, Focusing, &amp;amp; Taking a Picture ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Mamiya is slightly different than other cameras in that both the aperture and shutter speed are set on the bottom lens. There are individual rings for each of these settings. The '''aperture''' can be set by moving the little black handle on the left side of the lens and the '''shutter speed''' can be set by twisting the knob with fractions of a second on it. Do not change the shutter speed after the shutter has been cocked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The aperture ranges from f/2.8 to f/22 and the shutter speed ranges from 1/500th of a second to 1 seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since the Mamiya does not have an internal light meter there is no need for an '''ISO''' setting. The camera does however allow you to set the ISO of the film you are using on the dial configuration on the right side of the camera. This does not effect the performance of the camera at all but simply serves as a reminder for the kind of film you are shooting. Be sure to also check out a light meter from Media Loan when checking out a medium format camera.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like the Bronica, most of Media Loan's Mamiyas feature waist-level viewfinders although some of them come with prism viewfinders. You can request either when checking one out. Also like the Bronica, the Mamiya has a magnifier seated within the focusing hood that can be expanded for critical focusing. To '''focus''' the camera, the Mamiya uses bellows that bring the lens closer or farther from the film plane. The lens is a fixed piece of glass and does not focus internally. To adjust the bellows and focus your image, twist either of the large black knobs on the bottom front of the camera. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After your film has been advanced by turning the crank clockwise, the camera is ready to '''take a picture'''. There are two ways to release the shutter. The first is a silver button on the front of the camera in the bottom left corner. A cable release can also be screwed in here. The second way is with the slide mechanism on the right side of the camera. There is a small black lever for your thumb. Slide this downward to release the shutter. As the Mamiyas are quite old, not all of the cameras are able to be fired with either method. Some can only use one or the other and this will be indicated by a note on the camera. Advance the film after each exposure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a shutter lock on the slide mechanism that can be pushed to the &amp;quot;L&amp;quot; position. This prevents both shutter releases from being able to move and is thus useful to use when transporting the camera or arranging your shot. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To take take a picture using '''multiple exposures''', there is a dial next to the film advance crank that has the option of either &amp;quot;SINGLE&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;MULTI&amp;quot;. Turn this to &amp;quot;MULTI&amp;quot; to be able to exposure a frame multiple times without needing to advance the film. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Unloading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
After twelve frames are exposed, continue to turn the winding crank until there is no more tension on the advance crank. At this point, the protective paper of the film should be rolled up around the take up spool. When unloading the film, keep the spool rolled and hold the film tightly to prevent light exposure. Lick or peel the tab on the film and wrap it firmly around the exposed film. Close the camera back.&lt;br /&gt;
==== Using a Flash ====&lt;br /&gt;
To synchronize a flash with the Mamiya, switch the Synchro Selector MX Switch to “X”.  You will need to check out a Vivitar flash and a flash sync cable.  Because the Vivitar flash was not designed to be used with the Mamiya, it will not properly mount on the hot shoe. Therefore, you’ll need to hold it while taking your picture. The Seagull and the Kalimar should not require a sync cable as they can mount onto the hot shoe.&lt;br /&gt;
Caution: Avoid moving the self-timer while the flash sync is set at “M”.  It may cause damage to the self-timer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Linkee14</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Medium_Format_Cameras_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=36355</id>
		<title>Medium Format Cameras Gear Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Medium_Format_Cameras_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=36355"/>
				<updated>2018-01-18T13:42:39Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Linkee14: /* Loading Film */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:MediumFormat-top-large.jpg|centre|800x800px]]&lt;br /&gt;
'''A proficiency test is required to check out these cameras.''' Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide and complete the written portion of the [[Medium Format Cameras Proficiency Test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. (You must already be proficient in the 35mm manual camera before obtaining this proficiency.) Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Introduction to Medium Format ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Medium Format vs. 35mm ====&lt;br /&gt;
This is an instructional guide to the medium format film&lt;br /&gt;
cameras available at Media Loan. It will cover a brief introduction to medium&lt;br /&gt;
format photography and then go through the operating steps for each of our&lt;br /&gt;
models. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When talking about film photography, there are three main&lt;br /&gt;
types of film, or formats: 35mm, medium format, and large format. With medium&lt;br /&gt;
and large format, the frame size on the film is much larger than 35mm film and yields significantly more detail and the ability to be printed at very large sizes. In essence, it&lt;br /&gt;
is a question of quality. The size and shape of the actual frame is variable&lt;br /&gt;
depending on the camera (whether your picture is a square, rectangle, skinny&lt;br /&gt;
rectangle, etc.) The size of the frame is often indicated in the name of the&lt;br /&gt;
camera, like the Pentax 6x7 whose frame dimensions are 6cm by 7cm. With 35mm&lt;br /&gt;
photography the size of the frame is always 35mm across regardless of the&lt;br /&gt;
camera used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Medium format film comes wrapped around a plastic spool with&lt;br /&gt;
light-safe black paper layered around the film itself. There is no metal&lt;br /&gt;
canister like with 35mm film. Additionally, when there are no more exposures&lt;br /&gt;
left on the roll, medium format film is not rewound back on to the spool but is&lt;br /&gt;
transferred to another take-up spool on the other side of the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of medium format film, 120 and 220. The&lt;br /&gt;
film is exactly the same except that 220 film contains twice the amount of&lt;br /&gt;
exposures as 120. However, most medium format cameras can shoot only one or the&lt;br /&gt;
other. The Pentax 6x7 and the Mamiya cameras have the ability to shoot both but the camera needs to be adjusted&lt;br /&gt;
to the right setting prior to loading the film. 120 film is the most common and&lt;br /&gt;
allows for 10-12 exposures depending on the camera’s aspect ratio. Keep in mind that not all photo labs can process 220 film.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Tools Required ====&lt;br /&gt;
In order to shoot on a medium format camera, you will need some&lt;br /&gt;
accessories. Some are optional while others are not. The essentials include an&lt;br /&gt;
'''empty film spool''' that your exposed film will be transferred on to (there should&lt;br /&gt;
already be one in the camera from the previous user. If there isn’t ask a Media&lt;br /&gt;
Loan staff member to give you one.) You will also need a '''light meter''' as most of our medium&lt;br /&gt;
format cameras do not have built in meters.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Refer&lt;br /&gt;
to [http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/Light_Meters_Quick_Guide Media Loan’s operating guide for light meters] to find out how to use what&lt;br /&gt;
might be called your medium format camera’s best friend.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other accessories include tripods, cable releases, and&lt;br /&gt;
flashes. If using a flash, remember to also pick up a flash sync cable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Precautions ====&lt;br /&gt;
These cameras are old, expensive, and used by many students. Please give them the respect they deserve. Before handling a camera, be&lt;br /&gt;
aware of what can potentially damage it and what improper usage looks like. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some general rules for these cameras are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
Do not expose them to water or moisture. They&lt;br /&gt;
are not weather proof.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
Do not leave in excessive heat, like in a car.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
Do not leave in excessive cold, like the&lt;br /&gt;
freezer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
Do not try to force any mechanism on the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
You’re probably doing it wrong if it feels like a lot of force.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
Do not remove the prism viewfinder or the lens. This will&lt;br /&gt;
get dust inside the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
NEVER LEAVE ANYTHING FROM MEDIA LOAN IN YOUR&lt;br /&gt;
CAR!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
As with all Media Loan equipment, you are 100% financially&lt;br /&gt;
responsibly for any damage and repairs done to the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Pentax-top.jpg|right|frameless]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Pentax Pressure Plate.jpg|thumb|150x150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pentax 6X7 ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Pentax 6x7 is perhaps the easiest to use of&lt;br /&gt;
all our medium format cameras as it most resembles the shape and operation&lt;br /&gt;
of a 35mm camera. It is a single lens reflex (SLR) camera meaning that what you see&lt;br /&gt;
through the viewfinder is the actual image that will appear on the film. This&lt;br /&gt;
camera can shoot both 120 and 220 film. You will not be able to release the&lt;br /&gt;
shutter until there is film loaded    &lt;br /&gt;
==== Before Loading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
Firstly, be sure that the wooden handle grip is screwed on&lt;br /&gt;
tight. All of the camera’s weight rests on this handle.[[File:IMG 3315.JPG|thumb|150x150px|left]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Pentax film type.jpg|centre|thumb|150x150px]]&lt;br /&gt;
Then you need to set&lt;br /&gt;
the film type you are working with, either 120 or 220. There are two places&lt;br /&gt;
that need to be adjusted for this. If you’re holding the camera like you would&lt;br /&gt;
to shoot, the first is on the right side of the camera. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a dial that&lt;br /&gt;
lets your choose between the two. You will need a quarter or a strong finger&lt;br /&gt;
nail to move it. The second adjustment is found on the inside of the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
Open the camera by pulling down on the silver release on the bottom left side&lt;br /&gt;
of the camera. Notice the black speckled pressure plate on the door. Following&lt;br /&gt;
the direction of the arrows there, gently push the pressure plate down and to&lt;br /&gt;
the side that corresponds to your film type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Loading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
It is best to do this while sitting as these cameras do not come with neck straps. First, open the back of&lt;br /&gt;
the camera if it is not already open from the previous step. On the bottom of&lt;br /&gt;
the camera are two silver dials that hold the film spools in place. Fold out their handles and turn these&lt;br /&gt;
counter-clockwise and pull them up until the stay put.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure your empty take-up spool is on the right side. If there is&lt;br /&gt;
no spool in the camera, ask a Media Loan or Photoland staff to give you one.&lt;br /&gt;
(It is common medium format etiquette to leave your old spool in the camera&lt;br /&gt;
when you’re done using it as it is not needed for developing.) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like with 35mm film, the Pentax 6x7 needs to be loaded&lt;br /&gt;
in a “up and over” style and not “down and under.”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
            INSERT&lt;br /&gt;
EXAMPLE PHOTO&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After you’ve aligned the cross in the top of the film spool&lt;br /&gt;
with the notch in the camera, close the silver dials on the bottom of the&lt;br /&gt;
camera. Now pull the film across to the right side of the camera and thread the&lt;br /&gt;
film into the take-up spool just as you would with 35mm film. Use the crank lever to advance the film&lt;br /&gt;
and stop when the arrows on the film paper line up with the arrow on the inside&lt;br /&gt;
of the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Close the back of the camera and advance the&lt;br /&gt;
film until “0” is line up with the red dot in the frame counter. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Exposing, Focusing, &amp;amp; Taking a Picture ====&lt;br /&gt;
The '''shutter speed''' is set by the dial on the top left side&lt;br /&gt;
of the camera. The current setting is indicated by whatever number is next to the&lt;br /&gt;
small red LED just to the right of the dial. Since there is no built in light&lt;br /&gt;
meter on this camera, there is no need to set the '''ISO''' for whatever film you are&lt;br /&gt;
using. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If using a flash, you must use a shutter speed on this&lt;br /&gt;
camera of 1/30&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;th&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; of slower. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to do a timed exposure longer than one second&lt;br /&gt;
and you don’t want to keep you finger on the shutter as the “Bulb”&lt;br /&gt;
setting would allow, rotate the shutter speed dial to anywhere between the red “X” and “1000.”&lt;br /&gt;
Now, releasing the shutter will keep it open until you rotate the shutter speed&lt;br /&gt;
dial back to “X”. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The '''aperture''' ring is located on the lens. This is the ring&lt;br /&gt;
closest to the body of the camera and ranges from f/2.4 to f/22. The aperture&lt;br /&gt;
ring will be your primary tool for exposing. Also located on the lens is an&lt;br /&gt;
aperture preview mechanism. This allows you get see your depth of field before&lt;br /&gt;
actually taking a picture. You can lock this switch in &amp;quot;AUTO&amp;quot; mode so&lt;br /&gt;
that you will always be previewing your aperture. To do this, slide the switch&lt;br /&gt;
to &amp;quot;AUTO&amp;quot; and push down. To release it back to manual, push down on the other side of&lt;br /&gt;
the switch. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To focus, simply look through the viewfinder and adjust the&lt;br /&gt;
focus ring until the split viewfinder is even and the image looks crisp.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To release the shutter and take a picture, first crank the film advance level with your right thumb and smoothly and firmly depress the silver button next to the crank.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A cable release can be attached by screwing one into the shutter release button just as with Media Loan's 35mm Pentax K-1000 cameras.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Pentax 6x7 can not take multiple exposure pictures.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Unloading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once all of the frames are exposed you’ll want to unload&lt;br /&gt;
your film. When you’re ready to do this, wind the crank a few more times until&lt;br /&gt;
there is no more tension in the crank lever. By now the protective light-safe&lt;br /&gt;
paper should be covering the film and totally wrapped around the spool.&lt;br /&gt;
Unfasten the silver dials just like when loading film. Keeping a firm grip on the film so that it doesn't unroll,&lt;br /&gt;
lick or peel off the sticky tape on the roll and make sure it is securely attached to the&lt;br /&gt;
spool. Close everything back up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Using a Flash ====&lt;br /&gt;
To use a flash with the Pentax 6x7, first attach the flash to the hot shoe mount on the handle. This camera has options for both X-type sync cables and FP-type sync cables. Use only the X-type as plugging an X cable into an FP housing can cause damage. Again, this camera can only use a flash when the shutter speed is set to 1/30th of a second or slower.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Bronica-top2.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bronica ETRS, ETRSI, &amp;amp; SQ-B ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are three different models of the Bronica available at Media Loan: SB-Q, ETRS, and ETRSi. They are very similar in operation except for a few minor things like button placement and the viewfinders and accessories that come with each camera. The aspect ratio that these cameras shoot at is also different. &lt;br /&gt;
* The ETRS and ETRSi have prism viewfinders and are in a 6x6 (square) format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The SB-Q (aka 645) has a wast-level view finder and is in a 6x4.5 (rectangle) format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Bronica begins to feel like a departure from the 35mm cameras. It is essentially a cube with a lens attached. One notices a very different feel when shooting with a Bronica than with the Pentax 6x7. Since a lot of the controls are not in conventional places, it may take some time to get acquainted with this camera. All of the Bronica cameras can only use 120 film. &lt;br /&gt;
==== Loading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Bronica-Loading.gif|right|222x222px]]&lt;br /&gt;
To load film, open the back of the camera by pinching the buttons that lie just under the viewfinder that are indicated by arrows. It is spring loaded and the film cartridge may fall out so be prepared. The outer shell will fold down and then the film cartridge can be removed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Bronica, film moves from top to bottom. This means your new roll of film will be on top and your empty spool on bottom Now that you're holding the film cartridge, notice there are two door flaps on the left side. Using your finger, push them open from the inside out. You will now be able to remove or insert film spools into each slot. Make sure the empty spool is on bottom and the fresh film is on top. Now you will take the film leader and run it over the pressure plate on the opposite side, bringing it down and around to the empty take up spool. A proper loading will have the black side of the paper leader facing outwards over the pressure plate.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, using the manual film advance wheel located on the right side of the cartridge, advance the film until the arrow on the leader aligns with the red arrow on the inside left of the cartridge.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To close the camera, the cartridge must first be aligned properly on the camera body, not inserted into the door. Once the cartridge is in place, close the door. It can be a little tricky to get it perfectly aligned. Do not force anything. If the door won't shut, take the cartridge out and try again. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now wind the film advance lever until it stops moving and the frame counter is at 0. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Waist-level Viewfinder ====&lt;br /&gt;
Many of Media Loan's Bronicas, like the Mamiyas, feature waist-level viewfinders. This is different than a prism viewfinder in which the viewfinder is held up to the eye. Alternatively, waist-level viewfinders are held at the waist and have a &amp;quot;screen&amp;quot; and magnifier for focusing. Most waist-level viewfinders open by simply folding up the top of the camera. Sometimes there is a small latch. There are metal walls that will snap into place once it is open. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To open the magnifier for critical focusing, there is another release latch on the inside of the focusing hood. To close the magnifier, simply move it back into place with your finger, trying not to touch the actual glass.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some of the Bronicas come with prism viewfinders, which you can ask for. Some of the prism viewfinders are electronic and feature an internal light meter. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Exposing, Focusing, &amp;amp; Taking a Picture ====&lt;br /&gt;
To set the '''shutter speed''', there is a dial on the right side of the camera body. The Bronica has a range of shutter speeds from 1/500th of a second to 8 seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The '''aperture''' is set by twisting the aperture ring on the lens and has a range of f/2.4 to f/22.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are using a Bronica with a built in light meter, set the '''ISO''' to match your film speed by twisting the dial on the left of the viewfinder. If it does not have an internal light meter, you do not have to worry about setting your ISO. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To focus, open the magnifier in the focusing hood as described in the previous section. The Bronica's lens functions conveniently like most other camera lenses. Twist the focus ring until your subject comes into focus.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before '''taking a picture''', the film must be advanced. Do this by winding the crank on the right side of the camera. When there is no film loaded in the camera, the crank will spin indefinitely. Once film has been loaded, the crank will stop itself in the correct position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The shutter release button is a black button located on the front of the camera in the bottom left corner. You can attach a cable release by screwing one into the cable release hole on the left side of the camera. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is preferable to take a picture in the steps in order to ensure a focused picture:&lt;br /&gt;
# Advance the film&lt;br /&gt;
# Set your shutter speed and aperture according to your light meter&lt;br /&gt;
# Focus on your subject&lt;br /&gt;
# Depress the shutter release button&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Using a Flash ====&lt;br /&gt;
A flash can be connected using an X-type sync cable. The port for this flash is located on the front side of the camera in the top right corner. When plugging and unplugging a sync cable, always pull gently and straight out. Never use a twisting motion to get it out. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Bronica can conveniently sync with flash at any shutter speed, even at its fastest of 1/500th of a second.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Multiple Exposure ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Bronica cameras can take multiple exposures, exposing a single a single frame an unlimited number of times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do this, first wind the crank to advance the film. There is a small lever next to the crank that needs to be rotated clockwise. A red warning indicator will appear in the viewfinder letting you know that the multiple exposure mode is engaged, however it is always wise to double check that this lever is in the left or counter-clockwise position (single exposure mode) prior to shooting. When the multiple exposure mode is set, the shutter can be cocked with the film advance crank an infinite number of times without actually advancing the film. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Mirror Lockup ====&lt;br /&gt;
The function of a camera's mirror lockup (also abbreviated MLU) is to reduce the potential for motion blur due to the movement of the mirror inside the camera. This movement will potentially effect photographs only when shooting at shutter speeds of 1/60th of a second or slower. Since the mirror that allows viewing and composing through the viewfinder before actually taking a picture is stuck in its upright position, you will no longer be able to use the viewfinder once the MLU function is engaged. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To engage this function on the Bronica, first advance the film with the crank. There is a lever located to the right of the multiple exposure lever. Move this lever counter-clockwise. You will know it is engaged when you can not see anything through the viewfinder. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are three settings for the mirror lockup function. &amp;quot;N&amp;quot; for normal in which the mirror will not lock up, and &amp;quot;S&amp;quot; for single frame and &amp;quot;C&amp;quot; for continuous in which the mirror will be locked up. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are on your last exposure of the roll and the mirror lock up function is still engaged, the shutter will continue to release every 360 degree turn and will not advance the film as would usually happen after the last exposure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Electronic Prism Viewfinder Operation ====&lt;br /&gt;
...&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mamiya-top.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mamiya C330 &amp;amp; C220 ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Mamiya cameras at Media Loan are perhaps the least intuitive to use of the medium format cameras. Learning to use one properly, however, is well worth it for both high quality images and mad style points. Like large format cameras, the Mamiya uses bellows to focus. Instead of adjusting the elements of glass within the lens, like with lenses that can focus internally, bellows physically move the lens farther or closer to the plane of film in order to focus.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Mamiya shoots square frames that are 2 1/4 inch long in each direction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Before Loading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mamiya-Unlocking.gif|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
Like the Pentax 6x7, the Mamiya can shoot with either 120 or 220 film and the camera needs to be adjusted accordingly before loading film. First, adjust the orientation of the pressure plate on the inside of the camera to coincide with the kind of film you are using. To open the back of the camera rotate the silver locking disk at the top of the back side of the camera so that the red dot is pointing up and you can slide the disk in the direction of the arrow. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because the Mamiya uses a twin lens system rather than being an SLR, you will also need to adjust the parallax adjustment to match whatever the focal length of the lens is you are using. This can be set by the outer ring on the main dial on the left side of the camera. Depending on the adjustment made and the distance of the camera from the subject, a bar will appear on the left side of the viewfinder. ''This is important to notice as it indicates the top of the frame and everything above the bar will be cut off on the actual film, even though it is present in the viewfinder.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, because the farther the bellows take the lens away from the film, light is increasingly lost along the way from when it enters the lens to when it reaches the film. Inside the viewfinder, the number that the moving bar lands at indicates in number of stops how much to increase the exposure by in order to compensate for the reduced light. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Loading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
With the neck strap around your neck, open the back of the camera as indicated in the previous section. There are two spool release knobs on the left side of the camera. These pull out and will allow you to remove the film spools. Twist these knobs while pulling to lock them in their disengaged position. On the Mamiya, the film moves from bottom to top, opposite of the Bronica cameras move film. Accordingly, place the empty take up spool in the top compartment. Lock it in place. Then place your fresh roll of film in the bottom compartment and lock it in place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pull out the film leader from the fresh spool and bring it up to the empty spool and thread it into that spool. Once threaded, turn the film advance crank on the right side of the camera clockwise to advance the film leader until the printed arrow on the leader matches up with the start mark on the inside of the camera (located a little lower than half way down on the right side.) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Close the back of the camera by pushing firmly on either side of the silver locking dial. Once closed, turn the locking dial counter-clockwise to lock the back cover in place. Continue to turn the film advance crank clockwise until it won't turn anymore. Your shutter is now cocked and ready to take a picture. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Exposing, Focusing, &amp;amp; Taking a Picture ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Mamiya is slightly different than other cameras in that both the aperture and shutter speed are set on the bottom lens. There are individual rings for each of these settings. The '''aperture''' can be set by moving the little black handle on the left side of the lens and the '''shutter speed''' can be set by twisting the knob with fractions of a second on it. Do not change the shutter speed after the shutter has been cocked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The aperture ranges from f/2.8 to f/22 and the shutter speed ranges from 1/500th of a second to 1 seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since the Mamiya does not have an internal light meter there is no need for an '''ISO''' setting. The camera does however allow you to set the ISO of the film you are using on the dial configuration on the right side of the camera. This does not effect the performance of the camera at all but simply serves as a reminder for the kind of film you are shooting. Be sure to also check out a light meter from Media Loan when checking out a medium format camera.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like the Bronica, most of Media Loan's Mamiyas feature waist-level viewfinders although some of them come with prism viewfinders. You can request either when checking one out. Also like the Bronica, the Mamiya has a magnifier seated within the focusing hood that can be expanded for critical focusing. To '''focus''' the camera, the Mamiya uses bellows that bring the lens closer or farther from the film plane. The lens is a fixed piece of glass and does not focus internally. To adjust the bellows and focus your image, twist either of the large black knobs on the bottom front of the camera. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After your film has been advanced by turning the crank clockwise, the camera is ready to '''take a picture'''. There are two ways to release the shutter. The first is a silver button on the front of the camera in the bottom left corner. A cable release can also be screwed in here. The second way is with the slide mechanism on the right side of the camera. There is a small black lever for your thumb. Slide this downward to release the shutter. As the Mamiyas are quite old, not all of the cameras are able to be fired with either method. Some can only use one or the other and this will be indicated by a note on the camera. Advance the film after each exposure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a shutter lock on the slide mechanism that can be pushed to the &amp;quot;L&amp;quot; position. This prevents both shutter releases from being able to move and is thus useful to use when transporting the camera or arranging your shot. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To take take a picture using '''multiple exposures''', there is a dial next to the film advance crank that has the option of either &amp;quot;SINGLE&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;MULTI&amp;quot;. Turn this to &amp;quot;MULTI&amp;quot; to be able to exposure a frame multiple times without needing to advance the film. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Unloading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
After twelve frames are exposed, continue to turn the winding crank until there is no more tension on the advance crank. At this point, the protective paper of the film should be rolled up around the take up spool. When unloading the film, keep the spool rolled and hold the film tightly to prevent light exposure. Lick or peel the tab on the film and wrap it firmly around the exposed film. Close the camera back.&lt;br /&gt;
==== Using a Flash ====&lt;br /&gt;
To synchronize a flash with the Mamiya, switch the Synchro Selector MX Switch to “X”.  You will need to check out a Vivitar flash and a flash sync cable.  Because the Vivitar flash was not designed to be used with the Mamiya, it will not properly mount on the hot shoe. Therefore, you’ll need to hold it while taking your picture. The Seagull and the Kalimar should not require a sync cable as they can mount onto the hot shoe.&lt;br /&gt;
Caution: Avoid moving the self-timer while the flash sync is set at “M”.  It may cause damage to the self-timer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Linkee14</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Pentax_locks.jpg&amp;diff=36354</id>
		<title>File:Pentax locks.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Pentax_locks.jpg&amp;diff=36354"/>
				<updated>2018-01-18T13:40:39Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Linkee14: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Linkee14</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Pentax_Pressure_Plate.jpg&amp;diff=36353</id>
		<title>File:Pentax Pressure Plate.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Pentax_Pressure_Plate.jpg&amp;diff=36353"/>
				<updated>2018-01-18T13:35:30Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Linkee14: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Linkee14</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Pentax_film_type.jpg&amp;diff=36352</id>
		<title>File:Pentax film type.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Pentax_film_type.jpg&amp;diff=36352"/>
				<updated>2018-01-18T13:34:44Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Linkee14: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Linkee14</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:MediumFormat-top-large.jpg&amp;diff=36351</id>
		<title>File:MediumFormat-top-large.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:MediumFormat-top-large.jpg&amp;diff=36351"/>
				<updated>2018-01-18T13:20:20Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Linkee14: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Linkee14</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=APS_Sony_HXR_HD_Camcorder_Proficiency_Test&amp;diff=36340</id>
		<title>APS Sony HXR HD Camcorder Proficiency Test</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=APS_Sony_HXR_HD_Camcorder_Proficiency_Test&amp;diff=36340"/>
				<updated>2018-01-09T21:42:57Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Linkee14: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:SONY HXR N5.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==WRITTEN TEST==&lt;br /&gt;
Answers may be found in the [[APS_Sony_HXR_HD_Camcorder_Operating_Guide|APS Sony HXR HD Camcorder Operating Guide]]. Complete this written portion and bring it with you to your scheduled operational proficiency. Call 867-6253 if you have any questions. Good luck!&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# What are the benefits of using an HXR rather than a Canon 6D?&lt;br /&gt;
# Describe how to avoid condensation from affecting the Sony HXR-NX5U.&lt;br /&gt;
# Describe how to supply power to the camera with a battery pack and with the AC power supply.&lt;br /&gt;
# Describe how to select the recording quality.&lt;br /&gt;
# Describe how to manually adjust the focus.&lt;br /&gt;
# Describe how to manually set the white balance.&lt;br /&gt;
# Describe how to manually adjust the iris.&lt;br /&gt;
# Describe how to manually adjust the shutter speed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Why would you use the zebra stripes?&lt;br /&gt;
# How many microphone inputs does this camera have?&lt;br /&gt;
# What is your financial responsibility when checking out the Sony HXR-NX5U from APS?&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==OPERATIONAL PROFICIENCY==&lt;br /&gt;
To be done during your scheduled appointment with APS Staff.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Remove the Sony HXR-NX5U from the case and identify all the parts.&lt;br /&gt;
# Supply power to the camera with the AC Adapter/Charger.&lt;br /&gt;
# Demonstrate how to properly remove and insert the supplied memory cards.&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the Sony HXR-NX5U on a tripod.&lt;br /&gt;
# Demonstrate how to set the recording quality for each memory card.&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the zebra stripes to 80 IRE.&lt;br /&gt;
# Adjust the focus, white balance, iris and shutter speed manually.&lt;br /&gt;
# Adjust the audio levels manually.&lt;br /&gt;
# Record and play back a few minutes of footage.&lt;br /&gt;
# Format the memory cards.&lt;br /&gt;
# Remove the camera from the tripod and pack neatly in its case.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Linkee14</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=APS_Canon_6D_Proficiency_Test&amp;diff=36339</id>
		<title>APS Canon 6D Proficiency Test</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=APS_Canon_6D_Proficiency_Test&amp;diff=36339"/>
				<updated>2018-01-09T21:37:47Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Linkee14: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;container-fluid&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;row&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;col-md-8&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;lead&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Proficiency test for the APS Canon 6D&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;[[File:6d 1.jpg|thumb]]Answers may be found in the [[Canon 6D Operating Guide]]. Complete this written portion and bring it with you to your scheduled operational proficiency. Call 867-6253 if you have any questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' the APS 6D kits come with lenses that have de-clicked, manual aperture rings. You can not change the aperture digitally through the body and subsequently the aperture preview button does not function with these lenses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note:''' Because these lenses have no digital components, they do not properly communicate with the light meter when taking photos through the viewfinder. The light meter is uneffected for video and live-view photography.&lt;br /&gt;
# What type of media are these 6D kits intended for?&lt;br /&gt;
# What are the main differences between the Canon 6D and a Canon Rebel?&lt;br /&gt;
# Describe at least one method to adjust each of the three exposure settings: aperture, ISO and shutter speed.&lt;br /&gt;
# Where are two places you can view your exposure settings?&lt;br /&gt;
# How do you activate Live View when taking pictures?&lt;br /&gt;
# How do you record video?&lt;br /&gt;
# Describe how to change a lens.&lt;br /&gt;
# Briefly define and describe why you would change the drive mode and metering mode.&lt;br /&gt;
# How is this different from APS kit lenses different than the lenses in General Access?&lt;br /&gt;
# The APS kit comes with variable neutral density (ND) filters. What are these for and how do you attach them?&lt;br /&gt;
# The 6D can record video at frame rates of 30 or 24 FPS at 1080p and 60 FPS at 720p. Talk about what these numbers mean. Also include the difference between ALL-I and IPD recording formats.&lt;br /&gt;
# What lens mount is compatible with this camera? What other similar lens mount is ''not'' and can cause permanent damage?&lt;br /&gt;
# Describe at least three ways this camera can be permanently damaged.&lt;br /&gt;
# If your equipment is lost, stolen or damaged who is 100% financially responsible?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Operational ====&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn the camera on and show how to change the ISO, shutter speed, and aperture settings.&lt;br /&gt;
# Adjust the diopter&lt;br /&gt;
# Demonstrate how to switch between photo/video mode as well as turn on Live View.&lt;br /&gt;
# Change the picture and video resolution/quality.&lt;br /&gt;
# Show how to format a memory card.&lt;br /&gt;
# Activate the Quick menu (Q) and name ALL of the settings that this button can change.&lt;br /&gt;
# Attach a lens and attach an ND filter to it.&lt;br /&gt;
# Demonstrate how to change and remove a lens.&lt;br /&gt;
# Create a proper exposure and record a video.&lt;br /&gt;
# Demonstrate how to critical focus.&lt;br /&gt;
# Demonstrate how to change the white balance and how to set a custom white balance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- end col-md-8 --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;col-md-1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;col-md-3 sidebar&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{GetHelp}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- end col-md-3--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- end row--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- end container--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Generator=Template:TwoColumn --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
__NOEDITSECTION__&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Generator=Template:TwoColumn --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Linkee14</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_6D_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=36338</id>
		<title>Canon 6D Gear Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Canon_6D_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=36338"/>
				<updated>2018-01-09T21:24:35Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Linkee14: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[file:6d_1.jpg|centre|600x600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=INTRODUCTION=&lt;br /&gt;
{{#ev:vimeo|159257397|500|right|APS Canon 6D Kit}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{#ev:vimeo|159256566|500|left|General Access Canon 6D Kit}}''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''[http://www.evergreen.edu//medialoan/docs/aps-docs/canon6dmanual.pdf Complete Manual for the Canon 6D]'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Here is where you can find the [http://wikis.evergreen.edu/computing/index.php/APS_Canon_6D_Proficiency_Test Canon 6D proficiency test.]'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Canon EOS 6D is the world's smallest and lightest full-frame DSLR. It features a 20.2 Megapixel Full-Frame CMOS sensor, a wide ISO range of 100-25600 for incredible image quality even in low light, and a DIGIC 5+ Image Processor delivers enhanced noise reduction and exceptional processing speed. A new 11-point AF including a high-precision center cross-type AF point with EV -3 sensitivity allows focusing in extreme low-light conditions, and with continuous shooting up to 4.5 fps, you are ready to capture fast action. Full HD video with manual exposure control, multiple frame rates, and the benefits of a Full-Frame sensor provides stunning performance and creative flexibility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Media Loan's other major DSLR is the Canon Rebel.  Compared to the Rebel T5i, the 6D has:&lt;br /&gt;
* 30% better image quality&lt;br /&gt;
* Water sealing &lt;br /&gt;
* Longer battery life (2x more photos per battery charge)&lt;br /&gt;
* More light sensitivity - 2 f-stops&lt;br /&gt;
* 20% better resolution (20.9MP vs. 17.9)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
...and more!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram_1.png|250px|right|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two 6D kit options at Media Loan.&lt;br /&gt;
The 6D kits in '''general access''' are built for photography purposes.  They include:&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x 1:4 24-105mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x remote kit&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x battery grip&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x battery charger&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x class 10 memory card&lt;br /&gt;
* 3x batteries&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''APS''' has two complete Canon 6D kits that are setup for utilizing the advanced video functions of the camera. The lenses are cine, manual, and prime, with an f/1.5. The kit includes: &lt;br /&gt;
* 1x shoulder mount rig with follow focus and viewfinder.&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x  24mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x 35mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
* 1x 85mm lens&lt;br /&gt;
* 2x variable ND (neutral density) filters &lt;br /&gt;
* 3x batteries and a &lt;br /&gt;
* 1x plug in power supply &lt;br /&gt;
* 1x class 10 memory card&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''APS''' also has lighting kits available for checkout which can be found here [http://blogs.evergreen.edu/medialoan/aps/aps-catalog/aps-lights/ APS Lighting Kits]&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Canon has some great tutorial videos on the [http://learn.usa.canon.com/galleries/galleries/tutorials/eos_6d_tutorials.shtml Canon] website.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=CARING FOR THE CANON 6D=&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:diagram_2.png|250px|right|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;*&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;NEVER LEAVE THE CAMERA BODY ANYWHERE BUT IN THE KIT -- THE SCREEN AND OTHER SENSITIVE INSTRUMENTS CAN GET SCRATCHED OR RUINED!*&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Media Loan has a very limited number of Canon 6D cameras. We appreciate your help in caring for this item to insure its long-term use at Evergreen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''DO NOT''':&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Drop this camera&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Point camera toward Sun&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Submerge this camera in water&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this camera near a strong magnetic field!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Leave this camera in excessive heat, such as a car&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Store this camera in excessive heat or cold&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use a blow dryer to blow dust from the camera&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Store this camera in a location where there may be corrosive chemicals&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Mount an EF-S Lens onto the body'''&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use excessive physical force&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Please be gentle with this camera; it looks hardy, but it's delicate!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====EF-S Lenses:====&lt;br /&gt;
EF-S Mount lenses ''cannot'' be used with the 6D.  The back of EF-S lenses extends too far back into the camera body and could damage the mirror or sensor.  ONLY USE EF LENSES WITH THE 6D.  All of the EF-S lenses at Media Loan are noted as such on their case, as well as on the lens itself.  If you want to use any lenses other than the lens(es) that come with the kit, you need to check with the Media Loan staff.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Quick Exposure Settings Guide=&lt;br /&gt;
There are multiple ways to adjust the shutter speed, ISO and aperture settings on the 6D. Exposure settings are shown on the bottom of the viewfinder, the bottom of the LCD screen in live view mode, and on the top right panel display. '''In the APS 6D kit, aperture can only be adjusted with a ring on the manual lenses.''' &lt;br /&gt;
# Q Menu: The most familiar way to adjust these is through the Quick selection button, Q.  This can only be activated in photo mode when live view is off.  Once activated, you can scroll through and adjust each setting accordingly.  &lt;br /&gt;
# Exterior buttons: In either photo or video mode, with or without live view, there are exterior exposure button controls. The circular quick control dial changes the aperture and the top main dial changes the shutter speed.  To adjust the ISO, turn the top dial while holding down the top ISO button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=FRONT CONTROLS=&lt;br /&gt;
===Depth-of-Field Preview button=== &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:depth_preview.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p align &amp;quot;right&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This button is located on the opposite side of the lens release. Press this button to preview what will actually be in focus as determined by the set aperture. The viewfinder will probably get much darker, and current settings will also be displayed near the bottom. You can program this button to do other things in the C.Fn. menu. (p. 147)&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Lens Release Button===&lt;br /&gt;
To remove a lens, press the lens release button and twist the body of the lens until the red dot is on top. Now pull the lens straight out. To attach a lens, line-up the lens' red dot to the red dot on the front of the top of the lens mount, push it straight in, and twist so the red dot is as shown above. You'll hear a click, and your lens is locked-in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=TOP CONTROLS=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:6d_2.jpg|400px|left|thumb|Canon 6D Top Controls]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Most of these adjustments can also be made with even more detail in the MENUs or with the QUICK [ Q ] CONTROL SCREEN. The power switch is on top, a new place not familiar to old-time Canon shooters.&lt;br /&gt;
===Exposure Mode (Top left knob)===&lt;br /&gt;
Use this knob to set the exposure mode. Use M for full manual mode.  The other settings will have some automatic features, depending on the mode you select.&lt;br /&gt;
===Top Main Dial===&lt;br /&gt;
The top, or front, dial sets many things. While shooting, it alters the exposure program (in P) or the aperture (Av mode), or the shutter speed (M or Tv modes). While playing, it usually jumps ahead or behind by 10 frames. You can set this in the playback menu. While zoomed in playback, it changes the zoom magnification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===AF Mode===&lt;br /&gt;
The Lenses in the APS VIDEO KIT are manual lenses and '''DO NOT''' work with Auto Focus, but the general access lenses do. The AF system is easy, and well-set right out of the box. With most lenses, hold the camera's AF-ON button to lock autofocus after it's focused the first time. These setting apply only to real (through the viewfinder) shooting. For movies or Live View (image seen on the rear screen while shooting) settings, see the Live View Menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You select between autofocus and manual focus with the switch on your lens. They're always in this same spot, regardless of the lens. It falls right under your thumb while shooting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Drive===&lt;br /&gt;
DRIVE sets whether the 6D shoots continuously or not, and sets the self timer and remote control options. Press the DRIVE button and move the top dial to change the drive mode. The settings are:&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:6d_drive.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===ISO (sensitivity to light)===&lt;br /&gt;
ISO sets the 6D's sensitivity to light. 100 is normal, and 6,400 or higher is much more sensitive for very low light. The higher the ISO, the more noise there will be in your image. Try to keep the ISO as low as possible. To adjust ISO, press ISO and turn the top dial.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Metering===&lt;br /&gt;
Use the following chart to determine which metering mode you should use.  Change the metering mode by pressing the meter button above the top LCD panel. &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[file:6d_meter.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===LCD Dial Light===&lt;br /&gt;
This one's easy: tap it and the 6D lights up the top LCD in amber so you can see what you're doing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=REAR CONTROLS=&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:6d_3.jpg|400px|left|thumb|Canon 6D Rear View]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====MENU Button====&lt;br /&gt;
The MENU button (top left rear) is the key to most of the detailed settings (see notes below).&lt;br /&gt;
====INFO Button====&lt;br /&gt;
Press the INFO button (next to the MENU button) with the 6D idle (tap the shutter to wake it from sleep to idle) and you'll see: Data Screen (blue and white text). Here you'll see a big list of random facts and figures. The most useful is telling you the date and time, and how much card memory you have left. If you call up this screen with the INFO button, it doesn't go away. To make this data screen go away, you have to press INFO again. Pressing INFO multiple times will display an electronic level.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Diopter Control====&lt;br /&gt;
This is the little wheel above the rubber eyepiece. Turn it until the finder displays become sharp. It can get knocked as you use the 6D, so if your finder gets blurry, readjust it.&lt;br /&gt;
====Photo/Video Lever====&lt;br /&gt;
To switch between movie and photo mode, turn the lever to the proper selection. For movies, you have to see the image on the rear screen to see what you're doing; you can't shoot them while looking through the optical finder. Turn the lever back to the silver camera icon to stop the rear screen display and return to still shots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Start/Stop (Live View)====&lt;br /&gt;
For Live View (seeing the picture on the rear LCD screen before you take it), turn the lever to your desired mode. Then press START/STOP to start and stop the rear display. Live View uses a lot of battery power. This button is also used to start/stop video recording.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====AF-ON Button====&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-ON button can do different things, as programmed in the menus. See Canon AF Settings for more.&lt;br /&gt;
====Exposure-Lock (AEL or *) Button====&lt;br /&gt;
The AE Lock button, curiously only marked as an asterisk (*), locks exposure. Once pressed, you'll also see an asterisk in your finder to let you know you've locked exposure. Hitting it again won't unlock the exposure; it simply relocks it again to a new value. There's no easy way to unlock this other than by taking the picture, changing the exposure mode, or letting the camera go to sleep.&lt;br /&gt;
====AF-Area Mode Button====&lt;br /&gt;
The AF-Area mode button, marked as [-|-], lets us select which of the 6D's 9 AF sensors are used, or set the 6D to use them all automatically.&lt;br /&gt;
====Magnification Button====&lt;br /&gt;
The magnification button, marked as a blue magnifying glass, lets you magnify or reduce the image(s) seen on the rear LCD screen. During playback, press the button and use the top dial to control how far you zoom in. Turned the other way, the top dial also lets you see many smaller images on the screen at once. It also works during Live View and Movie shooting. during Live View and Movie shooting, press the button a few times to cycle among the various magnifications.&lt;br /&gt;
====Play Button====&lt;br /&gt;
You know what the play button does. It also brings an image back to full-screen if it's been zoomed-in.&lt;br /&gt;
====The Quick Control [Q] Button====&lt;br /&gt;
The Quick Control [Q] button is one of the most useful buttons on the 6D, besides the shutter button. Press the [Q] and a screen loaded with settings appears. To change these settings once you get this screen, use the Master Controls to drive around, and the dial to change the setting. If you need more details about what you're setting, press the SET button again. There's no need to press OK or DONE or EXIT. The instant you've changed something, it's done. You can read and set apertures and shutter speeds on this screen, but in manual exposure mode, there is no indication for the correct exposure. For manual exposure, look at the bar graph in the finder or on the old top LCD. If you tap the INFO button, you'll call up the very similar INFO screen, which does drive the bar graph to let you set read manual exposure, but you'll have to set the shutter and aperture with the dials, not from the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
====Master Controls====&lt;br /&gt;
The master controls are what we use to juggle all the other settings. These include: the set button, the multi-controller, and quick control dial. The '''SET''' button can be programmed in the menus, and makes the 6D do whatever you just set it to do. It also selects the center or all AF points when you're setting the AF-area modes. Around the SET button is a directional control ring, called the '''multi-controller'''. It works in four directions when playing in the menus, and during zoomed playback, lets you scroll around in eight directions. Around the directional controller is the big '''quick control dial'''. It can be used to control many things. During shooting, the big rear dial is very important as it changes exposure compensation. During menus and playback the big rear dial also does a lot; try it and see. During manual exposure, it also sets the aperture. The '''LOCK''' switch only prevents the rear dial from changing the exposure compensation (or aperture in manual exposure). It doesn't lock anything else, or any other functions (like menu or playback control) of the rear dial. We can change what the LOCK switch does in the C.Fn. menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Delete Button====&lt;br /&gt;
This is for deleting pictures. Press it, and use the master controls above to select ERASE and then press SET to delete the picture you're playing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=MENU SETTINGS=&lt;br /&gt;
Access the MENU to change various camera system settings, such as video/photo resolution and formats.  The MENU is organized into various tabs.  You can access the video settings in the MENU when the camera is set to video mode, and the photography settings when the camera is set to photo mode. &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Notes on settings:'''&lt;br /&gt;
====Movie Rec. Size====&lt;br /&gt;
'''IPB''' Choose IPB for normal use. The video looks the same as ALL-I below, and take up much less space. &amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''ALL-I''' Choose ALL-I only when you have huge data storage resources and need excruciating precision in frame-by frame editing for theatrical release. ALL-I is intended for the editing needs of professional tele-production and motion picture production, not for consumer use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Format card====&lt;br /&gt;
Format the memory card before returning your camera to Media Loan.  This not only clears it for the next user, but it also ensures protection of your work.  Make sure to transfer the files off of the card before you format.  Select “low level format” to completely clear the information (without low level format, your data will be retrievable by certain computer programs).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Video system====&lt;br /&gt;
This sets the analog video output to NTSC (Never The Same Color) or PAL (Problems Are Lurking). It should be set according to your country and not need adjustment. Use NTSC in the USA and Japan, and PAL in Europe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=REMOTE (GA Kit)=&lt;br /&gt;
The General Access kit comes with a remote, and there is multiple ways to use it. With this remote, 6D does not need to be in &amp;quot;remote&amp;quot; drive mode.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Steps for usage:&lt;br /&gt;
# Set the remote and receiver to the same channel.  On each, remove the battery cover and flip the switch up to a matching channel (typically ch. 1).  '''These must match'''.&lt;br /&gt;
# Plug the receiver into the corresponding input on the left side of the camera body.&lt;br /&gt;
# Power on the receiver and the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
# The shooting mode can be selected with the remote as well as the camera. The most direct way to use the remote is to set the camera to single shooting drive mode, and then use the remote to select your actual desired mode (single, continuous, BULB, and timer). The BULB function can be used two ways: two take quick, continuous shots (set the remote to bulb and the drive mode on the camera to continuous) and to take long exposures (set the remote to bulb and the exposure mode on the camera to BULB).  In both uses, press the remote button one to start shooting and again to stop.&lt;br /&gt;
# If set to AF, hold the main button on the remote down halfway to focus.  Press down all the way to take a picture in single shooting and timer modes.  In burst mode, keep the button pressed to take multiple shots.  In BULB, press the button once to open the shutter and a second time to close it.&lt;br /&gt;
# After a picture is take, you can hold the remote button halfway down again for a quick preview.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=SHOULDER RIG (APS Kit)=&lt;br /&gt;
The APS 6D kit comes with a shoulder rig.  This piece of equipment allows for stabilization of the camera.  Please watch the APS Canon 6D Kit video at the top of this page to learn how to assemble this rig.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Linkee14</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=APS_Bolex_16mm_Reflex_Proficiency_Test&amp;diff=36337</id>
		<title>APS Bolex 16mm Reflex Proficiency Test</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=APS_Bolex_16mm_Reflex_Proficiency_Test&amp;diff=36337"/>
				<updated>2018-01-09T21:03:05Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Linkee14: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;container-fluid&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;row&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;col-md-8&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;lead&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Please read manual and complete written portion of test prior to operational proficiency. Bring answers with you with your name and TESC ID number clearly indicated to workshop or proficiency test.[[File:Bolex bayonet front.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Written Test'''&lt;br /&gt;
# What other accessories are necessary to check out when checking out a Bolex. &lt;br /&gt;
# List the four steps necessary to set the diopter adjustment.&lt;br /&gt;
# What is the range of frames per second (FPS) that the Bolex is capable of shooting. How does changing the FPS effect the look of the film?&lt;br /&gt;
# What is the standard frame rate for shooting on 16mm film?&lt;br /&gt;
# What kind of viewing system does the Bolex H16 employ? Describe how it works.&lt;br /&gt;
# Explain the difference between Bolex RX lenses and non-RX lenses. What do you need to do to compensate for the difference?&lt;br /&gt;
# Describe the difference between a bayonet mount and a turret mount camera.&lt;br /&gt;
# What is the function of the turret plug?&lt;br /&gt;
# List the steps necessary to perform a lap dissolve.&lt;br /&gt;
# List the steps necessary to load the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
# What is film fog and how can you avoid it?&lt;br /&gt;
# What should you always do before putting the Bolex away?&lt;br /&gt;
# What is the extent of your financial responsibility in case of loss, or damage to the camera?&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;'''Operational Proficiency Test'''&lt;br /&gt;
* Identify all of the parts and control of the Bolex H16.&lt;br /&gt;
* Set the diopter.&lt;br /&gt;
* Show how to wind the camera motor&lt;br /&gt;
* Demonstrate how to insert and change filters in the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
* Set the fps at 24, set the counter at 0.&lt;br /&gt;
* Observe the differences between slow and fast frame rates.&lt;br /&gt;
* Load film in the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
* Demonstrate how to create a lap dissolve.&lt;br /&gt;
* Demonstrate extended exposure and animation features.&lt;br /&gt;
* Display proper lens mounting on both the turret and bayonet mount cameras.&lt;br /&gt;
* Properly attach a cable release.&lt;br /&gt;
* Demonstrate how to use a rewind.&lt;br /&gt;
* Wind the camera down before putting it away.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- end col-md-8 --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;col-md-1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;col-md-3 sidebar&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{GetHelp}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- end col-md-3--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- end row--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- end container--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Generator=Template:TwoColumn --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
__NOEDITSECTION__&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Generator=Template:TwoColumn --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Linkee14</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=35mm_SLR_Camera_Proficiency_Test&amp;diff=36336</id>
		<title>35mm SLR Camera Proficiency Test</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=35mm_SLR_Camera_Proficiency_Test&amp;diff=36336"/>
				<updated>2018-01-09T20:49:03Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Linkee14: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;container-fluid&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;row&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;col-md-8&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;lead&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A Proficency Test for the 35mm SLR Camera.[[File:35mm-top.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== WRITTEN TEST === &lt;br /&gt;
Answers may be found in the [[35mm SLR Camera Operating Guide]].&lt;br /&gt;
Complete this written portion and bring it with you to your scheduled operational proficiency. Call 867-6253 if you have any questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Explain what a film’s ISO/ASA number means. &lt;br /&gt;
# Explain what the shutter speed is and the two effects this control has on a photograph. &lt;br /&gt;
# Explain what aperture is, how you adjust it, and the two effects this control has on a photograph.  &lt;br /&gt;
# Describe how to open the back of the camera and load a roll of film.  &lt;br /&gt;
# What are the two ways to be sure the film is advancing through the camera?&lt;br /&gt;
# What are the two indications that you have come to the end of the roll of film? &lt;br /&gt;
# Describe how to rewind the film. &lt;br /&gt;
# What shutter speeds would require you to use a tripod in order to have a focused image.  &lt;br /&gt;
# Does this camera require a battery? &lt;br /&gt;
# What is the extent of your financial responsibility when checking out equipment from Media Loan?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Operational Proficiency=== &lt;br /&gt;
(TO BE DONE DURING YOUR SCHEDULED APPOINTMENT)&lt;br /&gt;
* Identify all of the camera’s controls. &lt;br /&gt;
* Show how to adjust the ISO, shutter speed, and aperture controls &lt;br /&gt;
* Familiarize yourself with the internal light meter and be confident with creating a proper exposure. &lt;br /&gt;
* Observe the internal mechanisms of the camera by releasing the shutter with the back cover open. &lt;br /&gt;
* Load a roll of film into the camera. Advance the film and release the shutter. &lt;br /&gt;
* Attach a cable release to the camera. &lt;br /&gt;
* Mount the camera on a tripod. &lt;br /&gt;
* Focus the camera through the viewfinder. &lt;br /&gt;
* Remove the camera from the tripod and then rewind the film. &lt;br /&gt;
* Demonstrate how to change lenses on the camera. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- end col-md-8 --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;col-md-1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;col-md-3 sidebar&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{GetHelp}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- end col-md-3--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- end row--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- end container--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Generator=Template:TwoColumn --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
__NOEDITSECTION__&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Generator=Template:TwoColumn --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 [[category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Linkee14</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=16mm_Film_Projector_Proficiency_Test&amp;diff=36335</id>
		<title>16mm Film Projector Proficiency Test</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=16mm_Film_Projector_Proficiency_Test&amp;diff=36335"/>
				<updated>2018-01-09T20:29:25Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Linkee14: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;container-fluid&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;row&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;col-md-8&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;lead&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Proficiency Test for 16mm Film Projector[[File:Eiki-top.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== WRITTEN TEST === &lt;br /&gt;
Answers may be found in the [[16mm Film Projector Operating Guide]].&lt;br /&gt;
Complete this written portion and bring it with you to your scheduled operational proficiency. Call 867-6253 if you have any questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# What are the extra supplies you need to check out when checking out a projector?&lt;br /&gt;
# Where is the power cable located and how do you put away the cable?&lt;br /&gt;
# List the steps involved in setting up and auto-threading the projector, from loading the film to adjusting the sound.&lt;br /&gt;
# Which way should the film come off the supply reel, clockwise or counterclockwise? What are sprockets and should they be facing towards you or away from you when loading film?&lt;br /&gt;
# What is the function of the still picture clutch?&lt;br /&gt;
# Describe the different functions of the motor control knob. How do you run the projected forward? How do you run it backward?&lt;br /&gt;
# How do you rewind film? Can this be done before the film has run all the way through?&lt;br /&gt;
# How do you adjust the height of the projector?&lt;br /&gt;
# How do you insert and focus the lens?&lt;br /&gt;
# The projector lenses come separate from the projector (Don't forget to ask for one.) Media Loan carries lenses with focal lengths of 16 (wide angle), 25, 38, 50, and 76mm (telephoto). Explain how the differences between these effect the projection and what scenario you would use either a wide angle or telephoto lens.&lt;br /&gt;
# Who is 100% financially responsible for checked out Media Loan equipment?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== OPERATIONAL PROFICIENCY ===&lt;br /&gt;
To be done during your scheduled appointment at Media Loan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Identify all the parts and controls on the projector.&lt;br /&gt;
* Use the film cutter and auto-thread a film through the projector.&lt;br /&gt;
* Manually thread a film through the projector.&lt;br /&gt;
* Adjust the sound volume and tone controls.&lt;br /&gt;
* Demonstrate how to run the projector in reverse.&lt;br /&gt;
* Operate the frame hold control and framing lever&lt;br /&gt;
* Rewind the film onto the supply reel.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- end col-md-8 --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;col-md-1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;col-md-3 sidebar&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{GetHelp}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- end col-md-3--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- end row--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- end container--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Generator=Template:TwoColumn --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
__NOEDITSECTION__&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Generator=Template:TwoColumn --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 [[category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Linkee14</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=16mm_Film_Projector_Proficiency_Test&amp;diff=36334</id>
		<title>16mm Film Projector Proficiency Test</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=16mm_Film_Projector_Proficiency_Test&amp;diff=36334"/>
				<updated>2018-01-09T20:28:30Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Linkee14: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;container-fluid&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;row&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;col-md-8&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;lead&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Proficiency Test for 16mm Film Projector[[File:Eiki-top.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== WRITTEN TEST === &lt;br /&gt;
Answers may be found in the [[16mm Film Projector Operating Guide]].&lt;br /&gt;
Complete this written portion and bring it with you to your scheduled operational proficiency. Call 867-6253 if you have any questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# What are the extra supplies you need to check out when checking out a projector?&lt;br /&gt;
# Where is the power cable located and how do you put away the cable?&lt;br /&gt;
# List the steps involved in setting up and auto-threading the projector, from loading the film to adjusting the sound.&lt;br /&gt;
# Which way should the film come off the supply reel, clockwise or counterclockwise? What are sprockets and should they be facing towards you or away from you when loading film?&lt;br /&gt;
# What is the function of the still picture clutch?&lt;br /&gt;
# Describe the different functions of the motor control knob. How do you run the projected forward? How do you run it backward?&lt;br /&gt;
# How do you rewind film? Can this be done before the film has run all the way through?&lt;br /&gt;
# How do you adjust the height of the projector?&lt;br /&gt;
# How do you insert and focus the lens?&lt;br /&gt;
# The projector lenses come separate from the projector (Don't forget to ask for one.) Media Loan carries lenses with focal lengths of 16 (wide angle), 25, 38, 50, and 76mm (telephoto). Explain how the differences between these effect the projection and what scenario you would use either a wide angle or telephoto lens.&lt;br /&gt;
# Who is 100% financially responsible for checked out Media Loan equipment?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== OPERATIONAL PROFICIENCY ===&lt;br /&gt;
To be done during your scheduled appointment at Media Loan.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Identify all the parts and controls on the projector.&lt;br /&gt;
* Auto-thread a film through the projector.&lt;br /&gt;
* Manually thread a film through the projector.&lt;br /&gt;
* Adjust the sound volume and tone controls.&lt;br /&gt;
* Demonstrate how to run the projector in reverse.&lt;br /&gt;
* Operate the frame hold control and framing lever&lt;br /&gt;
* Rewind the film onto the supply reel.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- end col-md-8 --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;col-md-1&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div class=&amp;quot;col-md-3 sidebar&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{{GetHelp}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- end col-md-3--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- end row--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- end container--&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Generator=Template:TwoColumn --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
__NOTOC__&lt;br /&gt;
__NOEDITSECTION__&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- Generator=Template:TwoColumn --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 [[category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Linkee14</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Medium_Format_Cameras_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=36331</id>
		<title>Medium Format Cameras Gear Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Medium_Format_Cameras_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=36331"/>
				<updated>2018-01-06T23:31:57Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Linkee14: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[File:MediumFormat top.jpg|centre|500x500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''A proficiency test is required to check out these cameras.''' Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide and complete the written portion of the [[Medium Format Cameras Proficiency Test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. (You must already be proficient in the 35mm manual camera before obtaining this proficiency.) Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Introduction to Medium Format ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Medium Format vs. 35mm ====&lt;br /&gt;
This is an instructional guide to the medium format film&lt;br /&gt;
cameras available at Media Loan. It will cover a brief introduction to medium&lt;br /&gt;
format photography and then go through the operating steps for each of our&lt;br /&gt;
models. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When talking about film photography, there are three main&lt;br /&gt;
types of film, or formats: 35mm, medium format, and large format. With medium&lt;br /&gt;
and large format, the frame size on the film is much larger than 35mm film and yields significantly more detail and the ability to be printed at very large sizes. In essence, it&lt;br /&gt;
is a question of quality. The size and shape of the actual frame is variable&lt;br /&gt;
depending on the camera (whether your picture is a square, rectangle, skinny&lt;br /&gt;
rectangle, etc.) The size of the frame is often indicated in the name of the&lt;br /&gt;
camera, like the Pentax 6x7 whose frame dimensions are 6cm by 7cm. With 35mm&lt;br /&gt;
photography the size of the frame is always 35mm across regardless of the&lt;br /&gt;
camera used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Medium format film comes wrapped around a plastic spool with&lt;br /&gt;
light-safe black paper layered around the film itself. There is no metal&lt;br /&gt;
canister like with 35mm film. Additionally, when there are no more exposures&lt;br /&gt;
left on the roll, medium format film is not rewound back on to the spool but is&lt;br /&gt;
transferred to another take-up spool on the other side of the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of medium format film, 120 and 220. The&lt;br /&gt;
film is exactly the same except that 220 film contains twice the amount of&lt;br /&gt;
exposures as 120. However, most medium format cameras can shoot only one or the&lt;br /&gt;
other. The Pentax 6x7 and the Mamiya cameras have the ability to shoot both but the camera needs to be adjusted&lt;br /&gt;
to the right setting prior to loading the film. 120 film is the most common and&lt;br /&gt;
allows for 10-12 exposures depending on the camera’s aspect ratio. Keep in mind that not all photo labs can process 220 film.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Tools Required ====&lt;br /&gt;
In order to shoot on a medium format camera, you will need some&lt;br /&gt;
accessories. Some are optional while others are not. The essentials include an&lt;br /&gt;
'''empty film spool''' that your exposed film will be transferred on to (there should&lt;br /&gt;
already be one in the camera from the previous user. If there isn’t ask a Media&lt;br /&gt;
Loan staff member to give you one.) You will also need a '''light meter''' as most of our medium&lt;br /&gt;
format cameras do not have built in meters.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Refer&lt;br /&gt;
to [http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/Light_Meters_Quick_Guide Media Loan’s operating guide for light meters] to find out how to use what&lt;br /&gt;
might be called your medium format camera’s best friend.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other accessories include tripods, cable releases, and&lt;br /&gt;
flashes. If using a flash, remember to also pick up a flash sync cable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Precautions ====&lt;br /&gt;
These cameras are old, expensive, and used by many students. Please give them the respect they deserve. Before handling a camera, be&lt;br /&gt;
aware of what can potentially damage it and what improper usage looks like. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some general rules for these cameras are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
Do not expose them to water or moisture. They&lt;br /&gt;
are not weather proof.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
Do not leave in excessive heat, like in a car.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
Do not leave in excessive cold, like the&lt;br /&gt;
freezer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
Do not try to force any mechanism on the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
You’re probably doing it wrong if it feels like a lot of force.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
Do not remove the prism viewfinder or the lens. This will&lt;br /&gt;
get dust inside the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
NEVER LEAVE ANYTHING FROM MEDIA LOAN IN YOUR&lt;br /&gt;
CAR!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
As with all Media Loan equipment, you are 100% financially&lt;br /&gt;
responsibly for any damage and repairs done to the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Pentax-top.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pentax 6X7 ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Pentax 6x7 is perhaps the easiest to use of&lt;br /&gt;
all our medium format cameras as it most resembles the shape and operation&lt;br /&gt;
of a 35mm camera. It is a single lens reflex (SLR) camera meaning that what you see&lt;br /&gt;
through the viewfinder is the actual image that will appear on the film. This&lt;br /&gt;
camera can shoot both 120 and 220 film. You will not be able to release the&lt;br /&gt;
shutter until there is film loaded    &lt;br /&gt;
==== Before Loading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:IMG 3315.JPG|thumb|200x200px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Firstly, be sure that the wooden handle grip is screwed on&lt;br /&gt;
tight. All of the camera’s weight rests on this handle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then you need to set&lt;br /&gt;
the film type you are working with, either 120 or 220. There are two places&lt;br /&gt;
that need to be adjusted for this. If you’re holding the camera like you would&lt;br /&gt;
to shoot, the first is on the right side of the camera. There is a dial that&lt;br /&gt;
lets your choose between the two. You will need a quarter or a strong finger&lt;br /&gt;
nail to move it. The second adjustment is found on the inside of the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
Open the camera by pulling down on the silver release on the bottom left side&lt;br /&gt;
of the ca mera. Notice the black speckled pressure plate on the door. Following&lt;br /&gt;
the direction of the arrows there, gently push the pressure plate down and to&lt;br /&gt;
the side that corresponds to your film type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Loading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
It is best to do this while sitting as these cameras do not com with neck straps. First, open the back of&lt;br /&gt;
the camera if it is not already open from the previous step. On the bottom of&lt;br /&gt;
the camera are two silver dials that hold the film spools in place. Fold out their handles and turn these&lt;br /&gt;
counter-clockwise and pull them up until the stay put.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure your empty take-up spool is on the right side. If there is&lt;br /&gt;
no spool in the camera, ask a Media Loan or Photoland staff to give you one.&lt;br /&gt;
(It is common medium format etiquette to leave your old spool in the camera&lt;br /&gt;
when you’re done using it as it is not needed for developing.) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like with 35mm film, the Pentax 6x7 needs to be loaded&lt;br /&gt;
in a “up and over” style and not “down and under.”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
            INSERT&lt;br /&gt;
EXAMPLE PHOTO&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After you’ve aligned the cross in the top of the film spool&lt;br /&gt;
with the notch in the camera, close the silver dials on the bottom of the&lt;br /&gt;
camera. Now pull the film across to the right side of the camera and thread the&lt;br /&gt;
film into the take-up spool just as you would with 35mm film. Use the crank lever to advance the film&lt;br /&gt;
and stop when the arrows on the film paper line up with the arrow on the inside&lt;br /&gt;
of the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Close the back of the camera and advance the&lt;br /&gt;
film until “0” is line up with the red dot in the frame counter. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Exposing, Focusing, &amp;amp; Taking a Picture ====&lt;br /&gt;
The '''shutter speed''' is set by the dial on the top left side&lt;br /&gt;
of the camera. The current setting is indicated by whatever number is next to the&lt;br /&gt;
small red LED just to the right of the dial. Since there is no built in light&lt;br /&gt;
meter on this camera, there is no need to set the '''ISO''' for whatever film you are&lt;br /&gt;
using. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If using a flash, you must use a shutter speed on this&lt;br /&gt;
camera of 1/30&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;th&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; of slower. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to do a timed exposure longer than one second&lt;br /&gt;
and you don’t want to keep you finger on the shutter as the “Bulb”&lt;br /&gt;
setting would allow, rotate the shutter speed dial to anywhere between the red “X” and “1000.”&lt;br /&gt;
Now, releasing the shutter will keep it open until you rotate the shutter speed&lt;br /&gt;
dial back to “X”. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The '''aperture''' ring is located on the lens. This is the ring&lt;br /&gt;
closest to the body of the camera and ranges from f/2.4 to f/22. The aperture&lt;br /&gt;
ring will be your primary tool for exposing. Also located on the lens is an&lt;br /&gt;
aperture preview mechanism. This allows you get see your depth of field before&lt;br /&gt;
actually taking a picture. You can lock this switch in &amp;quot;AUTO&amp;quot; mode so&lt;br /&gt;
that you will always be previewing your aperture. To do this, slide the switch&lt;br /&gt;
to &amp;quot;AUTO&amp;quot; and push down. To release it back to manual, push down on the other side of&lt;br /&gt;
the switch. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To focus, simply look through the viewfinder and adjust the&lt;br /&gt;
focus ring until the split viewfinder is even and the image looks crisp.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To release the shutter and take a picture, first crank the film advance level with your right thumb and smoothly and firmly depress the silver button next to the crank.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A cable release can be attached by screwing one into the shutter release button just as with Media Loan's 35mm Pentax K-1000 cameras.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Pentax 6x7 can not take multiple exposure pictures.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Unloading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once all of the frames are exposed you’ll want to unload&lt;br /&gt;
your film. When you’re ready to do this, wind the crank a few more times until&lt;br /&gt;
there is no more tension in the crank lever. By now the protective light-safe&lt;br /&gt;
paper should be covering the film and totally wrapped around the spool.&lt;br /&gt;
Unfasten the silver dials just like when loading film. Keeping a firm grip on the film so that it doesn't unroll,&lt;br /&gt;
lick or peel off the sticky tape on the roll and make sure it is securely attached to the&lt;br /&gt;
spool. Close everything back up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Using a Flash ====&lt;br /&gt;
To use a flash with the Pentax 6x7, first attach the flash to the hot shoe mount on the handle. This camera has options for both X-type sync cables and FP-type sync cables. Use only the X-type as plugging an X cable into an FP housing can cause damage. Again, this camera can only use a flash when the shutter speed is set to 1/30th of a second or slower.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Bronica-top2.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bronica ETRS, ETRSI, &amp;amp; SQ-B ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are three different models of the Bronica available at Media Loan: SB-Q, ETRS, and ETRSi. They are very similar in operation except for a few minor things like button placement and the viewfinders and accessories that come with each camera. The aspect ratio that these cameras shoot at is also different. &lt;br /&gt;
* The ETRS and ETRSi have prism viewfinders and are in a 6x6 (square) format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The SB-Q (aka 645) has a wast-level view finder and is in a 6x4.5 (rectangle) format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Bronica begins to feel like a departure from the 35mm cameras. It is essentially a cube with a lens attached. One notices a very different feel when shooting with a Bronica than with the Pentax 6x7. Since a lot of the controls are not in conventional places, it may take some time to get acquainted with this camera. All of the Bronica cameras can only use 120 film. &lt;br /&gt;
==== Loading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Bronica-Loading.gif|right|222x222px]]&lt;br /&gt;
To load film, open the back of the camera by pinching the buttons that lie just under the viewfinder that are indicated by arrows. It is spring loaded and the film cartridge may fall out so be prepared. The outer shell will fold down and then the film cartridge can be removed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Bronica, film moves from top to bottom. This means your new roll of film will be on top and your empty spool on bottom Now that you're holding the film cartridge, notice there are two door flaps on the left side. Using your finger, push them open from the inside out. You will now be able to remove or insert film spools into each slot. Make sure the empty spool is on bottom and the fresh film is on top. Now you will take the film leader and run it over the pressure plate on the opposite side, bringing it down and around to the empty take up spool. A proper loading will have the black side of the paper leader facing outwards over the pressure plate.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, using the manual film advance wheel located on the right side of the cartridge, advance the film until the arrow on the leader aligns with the red arrow on the inside left of the cartridge.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To close the camera, the cartridge must first be aligned properly on the camera body, not inserted into the door. Once the cartridge is in place, close the door. It can be a little tricky to get it perfectly aligned. Do not force anything. If the door won't shut, take the cartridge out and try again. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now wind the film advance lever until it stops moving and the frame counter is at 0. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Waist-level Viewfinder ====&lt;br /&gt;
Many of Media Loan's Bronicas, like the Mamiyas, feature waist-level viewfinders. This is different than a prism viewfinder in which the viewfinder is held up to the eye. Alternatively, waist-level viewfinders are held at the waist and have a &amp;quot;screen&amp;quot; and magnifier for focusing. Most waist-level viewfinders open by simply folding up the top of the camera. Sometimes there is a small latch. There are metal walls that will snap into place once it is open. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To open the magnifier for critical focusing, there is another release latch on the inside of the focusing hood. To close the magnifier, simply move it back into place with your finger, trying not to touch the actual glass.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some of the Bronicas come with prism viewfinders, which you can ask for. Some of the prism viewfinders are electronic and feature an internal light meter. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Exposing, Focusing, &amp;amp; Taking a Picture ====&lt;br /&gt;
To set the '''shutter speed''', there is a dial on the right side of the camera body. The Bronica has a range of shutter speeds from 1/500th of a second to 8 seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The '''aperture''' is set by twisting the aperture ring on the lens and has a range of f/2.4 to f/22.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are using a Bronica with a built in light meter, set the '''ISO''' to match your film speed by twisting the dial on the left of the viewfinder. If it does not have an internal light meter, you do not have to worry about setting your ISO. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To focus, open the magnifier in the focusing hood as described in the previous section. The Bronica's lens functions conveniently like most other camera lenses. Twist the focus ring until your subject comes into focus.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before '''taking a picture''', the film must be advanced. Do this by winding the crank on the right side of the camera. When there is no film loaded in the camera, the crank will spin indefinitely. Once film has been loaded, the crank will stop itself in the correct position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The shutter release button is a black button located on the front of the camera in the bottom left corner. You can attach a cable release by screwing one into the cable release hole on the left side of the camera. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is preferable to take a picture in the steps in order to ensure a focused picture:&lt;br /&gt;
# Advance the film&lt;br /&gt;
# Set your shutter speed and aperture according to your light meter&lt;br /&gt;
# Focus on your subject&lt;br /&gt;
# Depress the shutter release button&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Using a Flash ====&lt;br /&gt;
A flash can be connected using an X-type sync cable. The port for this flash is located on the front side of the camera in the top right corner. When plugging and unplugging a sync cable, always pull gently and straight out. Never use a twisting motion to get it out. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Bronica can conveniently sync with flash at any shutter speed, even at its fastest of 1/500th of a second.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Multiple Exposure ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Bronica cameras can take multiple exposures, exposing a single a single frame an unlimited number of times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do this, first wind the crank to advance the film. There is a small lever next to the crank that needs to be rotated clockwise. A red warning indicator will appear in the viewfinder letting you know that the multiple exposure mode is engaged, however it is always wise to double check that this lever is in the left or counter-clockwise position (single exposure mode) prior to shooting. When the multiple exposure mode is set, the shutter can be cocked with the film advance crank an infinite number of times without actually advancing the film. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Mirror Lockup ====&lt;br /&gt;
The function of a camera's mirror lockup (also abbreviated MLU) is to reduce the potential for motion blur due to the movement of the mirror inside the camera. This movement will potentially effect photographs only when shooting at shutter speeds of 1/60th of a second or slower. Since the mirror that allows viewing and composing through the viewfinder before actually taking a picture is stuck in its upright position, you will no longer be able to use the viewfinder once the MLU function is engaged. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To engage this function on the Bronica, first advance the film with the crank. There is a lever located to the right of the multiple exposure lever. Move this lever counter-clockwise. You will know it is engaged when you can not see anything through the viewfinder. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are three settings for the mirror lockup function. &amp;quot;N&amp;quot; for normal in which the mirror will not lock up, and &amp;quot;S&amp;quot; for single frame and &amp;quot;C&amp;quot; for continuous in which the mirror will be locked up. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are on your last exposure of the roll and the mirror lock up function is still engaged, the shutter will continue to release every 360 degree turn and will not advance the film as would usually happen after the last exposure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Electronic Prism Viewfinder Operation ====&lt;br /&gt;
...&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mamiya-top.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mamiya C330 &amp;amp; C220 ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Mamiya cameras at Media Loan are perhaps the least intuitive to use of the medium format cameras. Learning to use one properly, however, is well worth it for both high quality images and mad style points. Like large format cameras, the Mamiya uses bellows to focus. Instead of adjusting the elements of glass within the lens, like with lenses that can focus internally, bellows physically move the lens farther or closer to the plane of film in order to focus.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Mamiya shoots square frames that are 2 1/4 inch long in each direction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Before Loading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mamiya-Unlocking.gif|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
Like the Pentax 6x7, the Mamiya can shoot with either 120 or 220 film and the camera needs to be adjusted accordingly before loading film. First, adjust the orientation of the pressure plate on the inside of the camera to coincide with the kind of film you are using. To open the back of the camera rotate the silver locking disk at the top of the back side of the camera so that the red dot is pointing up and you can slide the disk in the direction of the arrow. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because the Mamiya uses a twin lens system rather than being an SLR, you will also need to adjust the parallax adjustment to match whatever the focal length of the lens is you are using. This can be set by the outer ring on the main dial on the left side of the camera. Depending on the adjustment made and the distance of the camera from the subject, a bar will appear on the left side of the viewfinder. ''This is important to notice as it indicates the top of the frame and everything above the bar will be cut off on the actual film, even though it is present in the viewfinder.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, because the farther the bellows take the lens away from the film, light is increasingly lost along the way from when it enters the lens to when it reaches the film. Inside the viewfinder, the number that the moving bar lands at indicates in number of stops how much to increase the exposure by in order to compensate for the reduced light. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Loading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
With the neck strap around your neck, open the back of the camera as indicated in the previous section. There are two spool release knobs on the left side of the camera. These pull out and will allow you to remove the film spools. Twist these knobs while pulling to lock them in their disengaged position. On the Mamiya, the film moves from bottom to top, opposite of the Bronica cameras move film. Accordingly, place the empty take up spool in the top compartment. Lock it in place. Then place your fresh roll of film in the bottom compartment and lock it in place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pull out the film leader from the fresh spool and bring it up to the empty spool and thread it into that spool. Once threaded, turn the film advance crank on the right side of the camera clockwise to advance the film leader until the printed arrow on the leader matches up with the start mark on the inside of the camera (located a little lower than half way down on the right side.) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Close the back of the camera by pushing firmly on either side of the silver locking dial. Once closed, turn the locking dial counter-clockwise to lock the back cover in place. Continue to turn the film advance crank clockwise until it won't turn anymore. Your shutter is now cocked and ready to take a picture. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Exposing, Focusing, &amp;amp; Taking a Picture ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Mamiya is slightly different than other cameras in that both the aperture and shutter speed are set on the bottom lens. There are individual rings for each of these settings. The '''aperture''' can be set by moving the little black handle on the left side of the lens and the '''shutter speed''' can be set by twisting the knob with fractions of a second on it. Do not change the shutter speed after the shutter has been cocked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The aperture ranges from f/2.8 to f/22 and the shutter speed ranges from 1/500th of a second to 1 seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since the Mamiya does not have an internal light meter there is no need for an '''ISO''' setting. The camera does however allow you to set the ISO of the film you are using on the dial configuration on the right side of the camera. This does not effect the performance of the camera at all but simply serves as a reminder for the kind of film you are shooting. Be sure to also check out a light meter from Media Loan when checking out a medium format camera.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like the Bronica, most of Media Loan's Mamiyas feature waist-level viewfinders although some of them come with prism viewfinders. You can request either when checking one out. Also like the Bronica, the Mamiya has a magnifier seated within the focusing hood that can be expanded for critical focusing. To '''focus''' the camera, the Mamiya uses bellows that bring the lens closer or farther from the film plane. The lens is a fixed piece of glass and does not focus internally. To adjust the bellows and focus your image, twist either of the large black knobs on the bottom front of the camera. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After your film has been advanced by turning the crank clockwise, the camera is ready to '''take a picture'''. There are two ways to release the shutter. The first is a silver button on the front of the camera in the bottom left corner. A cable release can also be screwed in here. The second way is with the slide mechanism on the right side of the camera. There is a small black lever for your thumb. Slide this downward to release the shutter. As the Mamiyas are quite old, not all of the cameras are able to be fired with either method. Some can only use one or the other and this will be indicated by a note on the camera. Advance the film after each exposure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a shutter lock on the slide mechanism that can be pushed to the &amp;quot;L&amp;quot; position. This prevents both shutter releases from being able to move and is thus useful to use when transporting the camera or arranging your shot. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To take take a picture using '''multiple exposures''', there is a dial next to the film advance crank that has the option of either &amp;quot;SINGLE&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;MULTI&amp;quot;. Turn this to &amp;quot;MULTI&amp;quot; to be able to exposure a frame multiple times without needing to advance the film. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Unloading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
After twelve frames are exposed, continue to turn the winding crank until there is no more tension on the advance crank. At this point, the protective paper of the film should be rolled up around the take up spool. When unloading the film, keep the spool rolled and hold the film tightly to prevent light exposure. Lick or peel the tab on the film and wrap it firmly around the exposed film. Close the camera back.&lt;br /&gt;
==== Using a Flash ====&lt;br /&gt;
To synchronize a flash with the Mamiya, switch the Synchro Selector MX Switch to “X”.  You will need to check out a Vivitar flash and a flash sync cable.  Because the Vivitar flash was not designed to be used with the Mamiya, it will not properly mount on the hot shoe. Therefore, you’ll need to hold it while taking your picture. The Seagull and the Kalimar should not require a sync cable as they can mount onto the hot shoe.&lt;br /&gt;
Caution: Avoid moving the self-timer while the flash sync is set at “M”.  It may cause damage to the self-timer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Linkee14</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:IMG_3315.JPG&amp;diff=36330</id>
		<title>File:IMG 3315.JPG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:IMG_3315.JPG&amp;diff=36330"/>
				<updated>2018-01-06T02:47:33Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Linkee14: Linkee14 uploaded a new version of File:IMG 3315.JPG&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Linkee14</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:IMG_3315.JPG&amp;diff=36329</id>
		<title>File:IMG 3315.JPG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:IMG_3315.JPG&amp;diff=36329"/>
				<updated>2018-01-06T02:47:26Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Linkee14: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Linkee14</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:MediumFormat_top.jpg&amp;diff=36328</id>
		<title>File:MediumFormat top.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:MediumFormat_top.jpg&amp;diff=36328"/>
				<updated>2018-01-06T02:41:21Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Linkee14: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Linkee14</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Medium_Format_Cameras_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=36327</id>
		<title>Medium Format Cameras Gear Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Medium_Format_Cameras_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=36327"/>
				<updated>2018-01-06T02:40:36Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Linkee14: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;file:MediumFormat-top.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
'''A proficiency test is required to check out these cameras.''' Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide and complete the written portion of the [[Medium Format Cameras Proficiency Test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. (You must already be proficient in the 35mm manual camera before obtaining this proficiency.) Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Introduction to Medium Format ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Medium Format vs. 35mm ====&lt;br /&gt;
This is an instructional guide to the medium format film&lt;br /&gt;
cameras available at Media Loan. It will cover a brief introduction to medium&lt;br /&gt;
format photography and then go through the operating steps for each of our&lt;br /&gt;
models. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When talking about film photography, there are three main&lt;br /&gt;
types of film, or formats: 35mm, medium format, and large format. With medium&lt;br /&gt;
and large format, the frame size on the film is much larger than 35mm film and yields significantly more detail and the ability to be printed at very large sizes. In essence, it&lt;br /&gt;
is a question of quality. The size and shape of the actual frame is variable&lt;br /&gt;
depending on the camera (whether your picture is a square, rectangle, skinny&lt;br /&gt;
rectangle, etc.) The size of the frame is often indicated in the name of the&lt;br /&gt;
camera, like the Pentax 6x7 whose frame dimensions are 6cm by 7cm. With 35mm&lt;br /&gt;
photography the size of the frame is always 35mm across regardless of the&lt;br /&gt;
camera used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Medium format film comes wrapped around a plastic spool with&lt;br /&gt;
light-safe black paper layered around the film itself. There is no metal&lt;br /&gt;
canister like with 35mm film. Additionally, when there are no more exposures&lt;br /&gt;
left on the roll, medium format film is not rewound back on to the spool but is&lt;br /&gt;
transferred to another take-up spool on the other side of the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of medium format film, 120 and 220. The&lt;br /&gt;
film is exactly the same except that 220 film contains twice the amount of&lt;br /&gt;
exposures as 120. However, most medium format cameras can shoot only one or the&lt;br /&gt;
other. The Pentax 6x7 and the Mamiya cameras have the ability to shoot both but the camera needs to be adjusted&lt;br /&gt;
to the right setting prior to loading the film. 120 film is the most common and&lt;br /&gt;
allows for 10-12 exposures depending on the camera’s aspect ratio. Keep in mind that not all photo labs can process 220 film.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Tools Required ====&lt;br /&gt;
In order to shoot on a medium format camera, you will need some&lt;br /&gt;
accessories. Some are optional while others are not. The essentials include an&lt;br /&gt;
'''empty film spool''' that your exposed film will be transferred on to (there should&lt;br /&gt;
already be one in the camera from the previous user. If there isn’t ask a Media&lt;br /&gt;
Loan staff member to give you one.) You will also need a '''light meter''' as most of our medium&lt;br /&gt;
format cameras do not have built in meters.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Refer&lt;br /&gt;
to [http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/Light_Meters_Quick_Guide Media Loan’s operating guide for light meters] to find out how to use what&lt;br /&gt;
might be called your medium format camera’s best friend.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other accessories include tripods, cable releases, and&lt;br /&gt;
flashes. If using a flash, remember to also pick up a flash sync cable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Precautions ====&lt;br /&gt;
These cameras are old, expensive, and used by many students. Please give them the respect they deserve. Before handling a camera, be&lt;br /&gt;
aware of what can potentially damage it and what improper usage looks like. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some general rules for these cameras are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
Do not expose them to water or moisture. They&lt;br /&gt;
are not weather proof.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
Do not leave in excessive heat, like in a car.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
Do not leave in excessive cold, like the&lt;br /&gt;
freezer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
Do not try to force any mechanism on the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
You’re probably doing it wrong if it feels like a lot of force.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
Do not remove the prism viewfinder or the lens. This will&lt;br /&gt;
get dust inside the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
NEVER LEAVE ANYTHING FROM MEDIA LOAN IN YOUR&lt;br /&gt;
CAR!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
As with all Media Loan equipment, you are 100% financially&lt;br /&gt;
responsibly for any damage and repairs done to the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Pentax-top.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pentax 6X7 ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Pentax 6x7 is perhaps the easiest to use of&lt;br /&gt;
all our medium format cameras as it most resembles the shape and operation&lt;br /&gt;
of a 35mm camera. It is a single lens reflex (SLR) camera meaning that what you see&lt;br /&gt;
through the viewfinder is the actual image that will appear on the film. This&lt;br /&gt;
camera can shoot both 120 and 220 film. You will not be able to release the&lt;br /&gt;
shutter until there is film loaded    &lt;br /&gt;
==== Before Loading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Firstly, be sure that the wooden handle grip is screwed on&lt;br /&gt;
tight. All of the camera’s weight rests on this handle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then you need to set&lt;br /&gt;
the film type you are working with, either 120 or 220. There are two places&lt;br /&gt;
that need to be adjusted for this. If you’re holding the camera like you would&lt;br /&gt;
to shoot, the first is on the right side of the camera. There is a dial that&lt;br /&gt;
lets your choose between the two. You will need a quarter or a strong finger&lt;br /&gt;
nail to move it. The second adjustment is found on the inside of the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
Open the camera by pulling down on the silver release on the bottom left side&lt;br /&gt;
of the camera. Notice the black speckled pressure plate on the door. Following&lt;br /&gt;
the direction of the arrows there, gently push the pressure plate down and to&lt;br /&gt;
the side that corresponds to your film type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Loading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
It is best to do this while sitting as these cameras do not com with neck straps. First, open the back of&lt;br /&gt;
the camera if it is not already open from the previous step. On the bottom of&lt;br /&gt;
the camera are two silver dials that hold the film spools in place. Fold out their handles and turn these&lt;br /&gt;
counter-clockwise and pull them up until the stay put.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure your empty take-up spool is on the right side. If there is&lt;br /&gt;
no spool in the camera, ask a Media Loan or Photoland staff to give you one.&lt;br /&gt;
(It is common medium format etiquette to leave your old spool in the camera&lt;br /&gt;
when you’re done using it as it is not needed for developing.) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like with 35mm film, the Pentax 6x7 needs to be loaded&lt;br /&gt;
in a “up and over” style and not “down and under.”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
            INSERT&lt;br /&gt;
EXAMPLE PHOTO&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After you’ve aligned the cross in the top of the film spool&lt;br /&gt;
with the notch in the camera, close the silver dials on the bottom of the&lt;br /&gt;
camera. Now pull the film across to the right side of the camera and thread the&lt;br /&gt;
film into the take-up spool just as you would with 35mm film. Use the crank lever to advance the film&lt;br /&gt;
and stop when the arrows on the film paper line up with the arrow on the inside&lt;br /&gt;
of the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Close the back of the camera and advance the&lt;br /&gt;
film until “0” is line up with the red dot in the frame counter. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Exposing, Focusing, &amp;amp; Taking a Picture ====&lt;br /&gt;
The '''shutter speed''' is set by the dial on the top left side&lt;br /&gt;
of the camera. The current setting is indicated by whatever number is next to the&lt;br /&gt;
small red LED just to the right of the dial. Since there is no built in light&lt;br /&gt;
meter on this camera, there is no need to set the '''ISO''' for whatever film you are&lt;br /&gt;
using. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If using a flash, you must use a shutter speed on this&lt;br /&gt;
camera of 1/30&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;th&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; of slower. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to do a timed exposure longer than one second&lt;br /&gt;
and you don’t want to keep you finger on the shutter as the “Bulb”&lt;br /&gt;
setting would allow, rotate the shutter speed dial to anywhere between the red “X” and “1000.”&lt;br /&gt;
Now, releasing the shutter will keep it open until you rotate the shutter speed&lt;br /&gt;
dial back to “X”. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The '''aperture''' ring is located on the lens. This is the ring&lt;br /&gt;
closest to the body of the camera and ranges from f/2.4 to f/22. The aperture&lt;br /&gt;
ring will be your primary tool for exposing. Also located on the lens is an&lt;br /&gt;
aperture preview mechanism. This allows you get see your depth of field before&lt;br /&gt;
actually taking a picture. You can lock this switch in &amp;quot;AUTO&amp;quot; mode so&lt;br /&gt;
that you will always be previewing your aperture. To do this, slide the switch&lt;br /&gt;
to &amp;quot;AUTO&amp;quot; and push down. To release it back to manual, push down on the other side of&lt;br /&gt;
the switch. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To focus, simply look through the viewfinder and adjust the&lt;br /&gt;
focus ring until the split viewfinder is even and the image looks crisp.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To release the shutter and take a picture, first crank the film advance level with your right thumb and smoothly and firmly depress the silver button next to the crank.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A cable release can be attached by screwing one into the shutter release button just as with Media Loan's 35mm Pentax K-1000 cameras.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Pentax 6x7 can not take multiple exposure pictures.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Unloading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once all of the frames are exposed you’ll want to unload&lt;br /&gt;
your film. When you’re ready to do this, wind the crank a few more times until&lt;br /&gt;
there is no more tension in the crank lever. By now the protective light-safe&lt;br /&gt;
paper should be covering the film and totally wrapped around the spool.&lt;br /&gt;
Unfasten the silver dials just like when loading film. Keeping a firm grip on the film so that it doesn't unroll,&lt;br /&gt;
lick or peel off the sticky tape on the roll and make sure it is securely attached to the&lt;br /&gt;
spool. Close everything back up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Using a Flash ====&lt;br /&gt;
To use a flash with the Pentax 6x7, first attach the flash to the hot shoe mount on the handle. This camera has options for both X-type sync cables and FP-type sync cables. Use only the X-type as plugging an X cable into an FP housing can cause damage. Again, this camera can only use a flash when the shutter speed is set to 1/30th of a second or slower.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Bronica-top2.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bronica ETRS, ETRSI, &amp;amp; SQ-B ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are three different models of the Bronica available at Media Loan: SB-Q, ETRS, and ETRSi. They are very similar in operation except for a few minor things like button placement and the viewfinders and accessories that come with each camera. The aspect ratio that these cameras shoot at is also different. &lt;br /&gt;
* The ETRS and ETRSi have prism viewfinders and are in a 6x6 (square) format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The SB-Q (aka 645) has a wast-level view finder and is in a 6x4.5 (rectangle) format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Bronica begins to feel like a departure from the 35mm cameras. It is essentially a cube with a lens attached. One notices a very different feel when shooting with a Bronica than with the Pentax 6x7. Since a lot of the controls are not in conventional places, it may take some time to get acquainted with this camera. All of the Bronica cameras can only use 120 film. &lt;br /&gt;
==== Loading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Bronica-Loading.gif|right|222x222px]]&lt;br /&gt;
To load film, open the back of the camera by pinching the buttons that lie just under the viewfinder that are indicated by arrows. It is spring loaded and the film cartridge may fall out so be prepared. The outer shell will fold down and then the film cartridge can be removed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Bronica, film moves from top to bottom. This means your new roll of film will be on top and your empty spool on bottom Now that you're holding the film cartridge, notice there are two door flaps on the left side. Using your finger, push them open from the inside out. You will now be able to remove or insert film spools into each slot. Make sure the empty spool is on bottom and the fresh film is on top. Now you will take the film leader and run it over the pressure plate on the opposite side, bringing it down and around to the empty take up spool. A proper loading will have the black side of the paper leader facing outwards over the pressure plate.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, using the manual film advance wheel located on the right side of the cartridge, advance the film until the arrow on the leader aligns with the red arrow on the inside left of the cartridge.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To close the camera, the cartridge must first be aligned properly on the camera body, not inserted into the door. Once the cartridge is in place, close the door. It can be a little tricky to get it perfectly aligned. Do not force anything. If the door won't shut, take the cartridge out and try again. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now wind the film advance lever until it stops moving and the frame counter is at 0. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Waist-level Viewfinder ====&lt;br /&gt;
Many of Media Loan's Bronicas, like the Mamiyas, feature waist-level viewfinders. This is different than a prism viewfinder in which the viewfinder is held up to the eye. Alternatively, waist-level viewfinders are held at the waist and have a &amp;quot;screen&amp;quot; and magnifier for focusing. Most waist-level viewfinders open by simply folding up the top of the camera. Sometimes there is a small latch. There are metal walls that will snap into place once it is open. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To open the magnifier for critical focusing, there is another release latch on the inside of the focusing hood. To close the magnifier, simply move it back into place with your finger, trying not to touch the actual glass.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some of the Bronicas come with prism viewfinders, which you can ask for. Some of the prism viewfinders are electronic and feature an internal light meter. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Exposing, Focusing, &amp;amp; Taking a Picture ====&lt;br /&gt;
To set the '''shutter speed''', there is a dial on the right side of the camera body. The Bronica has a range of shutter speeds from 1/500th of a second to 8 seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The '''aperture''' is set by twisting the aperture ring on the lens and has a range of f/2.4 to f/22.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are using a Bronica with a built in light meter, set the '''ISO''' to match your film speed by twisting the dial on the left of the viewfinder. If it does not have an internal light meter, you do not have to worry about setting your ISO. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To focus, open the magnifier in the focusing hood as described in the previous section. The Bronica's lens functions conveniently like most other camera lenses. Twist the focus ring until your subject comes into focus.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before '''taking a picture''', the film must be advanced. Do this by winding the crank on the right side of the camera. When there is no film loaded in the camera, the crank will spin indefinitely. Once film has been loaded, the crank will stop itself in the correct position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The shutter release button is a black button located on the front of the camera in the bottom left corner. You can attach a cable release by screwing one into the cable release hole on the left side of the camera. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is preferable to take a picture in the steps in order to ensure a focused picture:&lt;br /&gt;
# Advance the film&lt;br /&gt;
# Set your shutter speed and aperture according to your light meter&lt;br /&gt;
# Focus on your subject&lt;br /&gt;
# Depress the shutter release button&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Using a Flash ====&lt;br /&gt;
A flash can be connected using an X-type sync cable. The port for this flash is located on the front side of the camera in the top right corner. When plugging and unplugging a sync cable, always pull gently and straight out. Never use a twisting motion to get it out. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Bronica can conveniently sync with flash at any shutter speed, even at its fastest of 1/500th of a second.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Multiple Exposure ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Bronica cameras can take multiple exposures, exposing a single a single frame an unlimited number of times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do this, first wind the crank to advance the film. There is a small lever next to the crank that needs to be rotated clockwise. A red warning indicator will appear in the viewfinder letting you know that the multiple exposure mode is engaged, however it is always wise to double check that this lever is in the left or counter-clockwise position (single exposure mode) prior to shooting. When the multiple exposure mode is set, the shutter can be cocked with the film advance crank an infinite number of times without actually advancing the film. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Mirror Lockup ====&lt;br /&gt;
The function of a camera's mirror lockup (also abbreviated MLU) is to reduce the potential for motion blur due to the movement of the mirror inside the camera. This movement will potentially effect photographs only when shooting at shutter speeds of 1/60th of a second or slower. Since the mirror that allows viewing and composing through the viewfinder before actually taking a picture is stuck in its upright position, you will no longer be able to use the viewfinder once the MLU function is engaged. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To engage this function on the Bronica, first advance the film with the crank. There is a lever located to the right of the multiple exposure lever. Move this lever counter-clockwise. You will know it is engaged when you can not see anything through the viewfinder. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are three settings for the mirror lockup function. &amp;quot;N&amp;quot; for normal in which the mirror will not lock up, and &amp;quot;S&amp;quot; for single frame and &amp;quot;C&amp;quot; for continuous in which the mirror will be locked up. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are on your last exposure of the roll and the mirror lock up function is still engaged, the shutter will continue to release every 360 degree turn and will not advance the film as would usually happen after the last exposure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Electronic Prism Viewfinder Operation ====&lt;br /&gt;
...&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mamiya-top.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mamiya C330 &amp;amp; C220 ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Mamiya cameras at Media Loan are perhaps the least intuitive to use of the medium format cameras. Learning to use one properly, however, is well worth it for both high quality images and mad style points. Like large format cameras, the Mamiya uses bellows to focus. Instead of adjusting the elements of glass within the lens, like with lenses that can focus internally, bellows physically move the lens farther or closer to the plane of film in order to focus.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Mamiya shoots square frames that are 2 1/4 inch long in each direction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Before Loading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mamiya-Unlocking.gif|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
Like the Pentax 6x7, the Mamiya can shoot with either 120 or 220 film and the camera needs to be adjusted accordingly before loading film. First, adjust the orientation of the pressure plate on the inside of the camera to coincide with the kind of film you are using. To open the back of the camera rotate the silver locking disk at the top of the back side of the camera so that the red dot is pointing up and you can slide the disk in the direction of the arrow. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because the Mamiya uses a twin lens system rather than being an SLR, you will also need to adjust the parallax adjustment to match whatever the focal length of the lens is you are using. This can be set by the outer ring on the main dial on the left side of the camera. Depending on the adjustment made and the distance of the camera from the subject, a bar will appear on the left side of the viewfinder. ''This is important to notice as it indicates the top of the frame and everything above the bar will be cut off on the actual film, even though it is present in the viewfinder.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, because the farther the bellows take the lens away from the film, light is increasingly lost along the way from when it enters the lens to when it reaches the film. Inside the viewfinder, the number that the moving bar lands at indicates in number of stops how much to increase the exposure by in order to compensate for the reduced light. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Loading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
With the neck strap around your neck, open the back of the camera as indicated in the previous section. There are two spool release knobs on the left side of the camera. These pull out and will allow you to remove the film spools. Twist these knobs while pulling to lock them in their disengaged position. On the Mamiya, the film moves from bottom to top, opposite of the Bronica cameras move film. Accordingly, place the empty take up spool in the top compartment. Lock it in place. Then place your fresh roll of film in the bottom compartment and lock it in place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pull out the film leader from the fresh spool and bring it up to the empty spool and thread it into that spool. Once threaded, turn the film advance crank on the right side of the camera clockwise to advance the film leader until the printed arrow on the leader matches up with the start mark on the inside of the camera (located a little lower than half way down on the right side.) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Close the back of the camera by pushing firmly on either side of the silver locking dial. Once closed, turn the locking dial counter-clockwise to lock the back cover in place. Continue to turn the film advance crank clockwise until it won't turn anymore. Your shutter is now cocked and ready to take a picture. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Exposing, Focusing, &amp;amp; Taking a Picture ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Mamiya is slightly different than other cameras in that both the aperture and shutter speed are set on the bottom lens. There are individual rings for each of these settings. The '''aperture''' can be set by moving the little black handle on the left side of the lens and the '''shutter speed''' can be set by twisting the knob with fractions of a second on it. Do not change the shutter speed after the shutter has been cocked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The aperture ranges from f/2.8 to f/22 and the shutter speed ranges from 1/500th of a second to 1 seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since the Mamiya does not have an internal light meter there is no need for an '''ISO''' setting. The camera does however allow you to set the ISO of the film you are using on the dial configuration on the right side of the camera. This does not effect the performance of the camera at all but simply serves as a reminder for the kind of film you are shooting. Be sure to also check out a light meter from Media Loan when checking out a medium format camera.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like the Bronica, most of Media Loan's Mamiyas feature waist-level viewfinders although some of them come with prism viewfinders. You can request either when checking one out. Also like the Bronica, the Mamiya has a magnifier seated within the focusing hood that can be expanded for critical focusing. To '''focus''' the camera, the Mamiya uses bellows that bring the lens closer or farther from the film plane. The lens is a fixed piece of glass and does not focus internally. To adjust the bellows and focus your image, twist either of the large black knobs on the bottom front of the camera. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After your film has been advanced by turning the crank clockwise, the camera is ready to '''take a picture'''. There are two ways to release the shutter. The first is a silver button on the front of the camera in the bottom left corner. A cable release can also be screwed in here. The second way is with the slide mechanism on the right side of the camera. There is a small black lever for your thumb. Slide this downward to release the shutter. As the Mamiyas are quite old, not all of the cameras are able to be fired with either method. Some can only use one or the other and this will be indicated by a note on the camera. Advance the film after each exposure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a shutter lock on the slide mechanism that can be pushed to the &amp;quot;L&amp;quot; position. This prevents both shutter releases from being able to move and is thus useful to use when transporting the camera or arranging your shot. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To take take a picture using '''multiple exposures''', there is a dial next to the film advance crank that has the option of either &amp;quot;SINGLE&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;MULTI&amp;quot;. Turn this to &amp;quot;MULTI&amp;quot; to be able to exposure a frame multiple times without needing to advance the film. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Unloading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
After twelve frames are exposed, continue to turn the winding crank until there is no more tension on the advance crank. At this point, the protective paper of the film should be rolled up around the take up spool. When unloading the film, keep the spool rolled and hold the film tightly to prevent light exposure. Lick or peel the tab on the film and wrap it firmly around the exposed film. Close the camera back.&lt;br /&gt;
==== Using a Flash ====&lt;br /&gt;
To synchronize a flash with the Mamiya, switch the Synchro Selector MX Switch to “X”.  You will need to check out a Vivitar flash and a flash sync cable.  Because the Vivitar flash was not designed to be used with the Mamiya, it will not properly mount on the hot shoe. Therefore, you’ll need to hold it while taking your picture. The Seagull and the Kalimar should not require a sync cable as they can mount onto the hot shoe.&lt;br /&gt;
Caution: Avoid moving the self-timer while the flash sync is set at “M”.  It may cause damage to the self-timer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Linkee14</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:MediumFormat-top.jpg&amp;diff=36326</id>
		<title>File:MediumFormat-top.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:MediumFormat-top.jpg&amp;diff=36326"/>
				<updated>2018-01-06T02:38:38Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Linkee14: Linkee14 uploaded a new version of File:MediumFormat-top.jpg&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Linkee14</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:MediumFormat-top.jpg&amp;diff=36325</id>
		<title>File:MediumFormat-top.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:MediumFormat-top.jpg&amp;diff=36325"/>
				<updated>2018-01-05T04:33:39Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Linkee14: Linkee14 uploaded a new version of File:MediumFormat-top.jpg&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Linkee14</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Medium_Format_Cameras_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=36324</id>
		<title>Medium Format Cameras Gear Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=Medium_Format_Cameras_Gear_Guide&amp;diff=36324"/>
				<updated>2018-01-05T04:31:16Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Linkee14: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''A proficiency test is required to check out these cameras.''' Schedule a proficiency at the front desk of Media Loan or by calling 360-867-6253. Read this operating guide and complete the written portion of the [[Medium Format Cameras Proficiency Test]] prior to your scheduled proficiency. (You must already be proficient in the 35mm manual camera before obtaining this proficiency.) Bring your answer sheet with you to the test, which should take approximately 30 - 45 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Introduction to Medium Format ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Medium Format vs. 35mm ====&lt;br /&gt;
This is an instructional guide to the medium format film&lt;br /&gt;
cameras available at Media Loan. It will cover a brief introduction to medium&lt;br /&gt;
format photography and then go through the operating steps for each of our&lt;br /&gt;
models. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When talking about film photography, there are three main&lt;br /&gt;
types of film, or formats: 35mm, medium format, and large format. With medium&lt;br /&gt;
and large format, the frame size on the film is much larger than 35mm film and yields significantly more detail and the ability to be printed at very large sizes. In essence, it&lt;br /&gt;
is a question of quality. The size and shape of the actual frame is variable&lt;br /&gt;
depending on the camera (whether your picture is a square, rectangle, skinny&lt;br /&gt;
rectangle, etc.) The size of the frame is often indicated in the name of the&lt;br /&gt;
camera, like the Pentax 6x7 whose frame dimensions are 6cm by 7cm. With 35mm&lt;br /&gt;
photography the size of the frame is always 35mm across regardless of the&lt;br /&gt;
camera used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Medium format film comes wrapped around a plastic spool with&lt;br /&gt;
light-safe black paper layered around the film itself. There is no metal&lt;br /&gt;
canister like with 35mm film. Additionally, when there are no more exposures&lt;br /&gt;
left on the roll, medium format film is not rewound back on to the spool but is&lt;br /&gt;
transferred to another take-up spool on the other side of the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two types of medium format film, 120 and 220. The&lt;br /&gt;
film is exactly the same except that 220 film contains twice the amount of&lt;br /&gt;
exposures as 120. However, most medium format cameras can shoot only one or the&lt;br /&gt;
other. The Pentax 6x7 and the Mamiya cameras have the ability to shoot both but the camera needs to be adjusted&lt;br /&gt;
to the right setting prior to loading the film. 120 film is the most common and&lt;br /&gt;
allows for 10-12 exposures depending on the camera’s aspect ratio. Keep in mind that not all photo labs can process 220 film.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Tools Required ====&lt;br /&gt;
In order to shoot on a medium format camera, you will need some&lt;br /&gt;
accessories. Some are optional while others are not. The essentials include an&lt;br /&gt;
'''empty film spool''' that your exposed film will be transferred on to (there should&lt;br /&gt;
already be one in the camera from the previous user. If there isn’t ask a Media&lt;br /&gt;
Loan staff member to give you one.) You will also need a '''light meter''' as most of our medium&lt;br /&gt;
format cameras do not have built in meters.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Refer&lt;br /&gt;
to [http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php/Light_Meters_Quick_Guide Media Loan’s operating guide for light meters] to find out how to use what&lt;br /&gt;
might be called your medium format camera’s best friend.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Other accessories include tripods, cable releases, and&lt;br /&gt;
flashes. If using a flash, remember to also pick up a flash sync cable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Precautions ====&lt;br /&gt;
These cameras are old, expensive, and used by many students. Please give them the respect they deserve. Before handling a camera, be&lt;br /&gt;
aware of what can potentially damage it and what improper usage looks like. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some general rules for these cameras are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
Do not expose them to water or moisture. They&lt;br /&gt;
are not weather proof.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
Do not leave in excessive heat, like in a car.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
Do not leave in excessive cold, like the&lt;br /&gt;
freezer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
Do not try to force any mechanism on the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
You’re probably doing it wrong if it feels like a lot of force.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
Do not remove the prism viewfinder or the lens. This will&lt;br /&gt;
get dust inside the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
NEVER LEAVE ANYTHING FROM MEDIA LOAN IN YOUR&lt;br /&gt;
CAR!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
·     &lt;br /&gt;
As with all Media Loan equipment, you are 100% financially&lt;br /&gt;
responsibly for any damage and repairs done to the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Pentax-top.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pentax 6X7 ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Pentax 6x7 is perhaps the easiest to use of&lt;br /&gt;
all our medium format cameras as it most resembles the shape and operation&lt;br /&gt;
of a 35mm camera. It is a single lens reflex (SLR) camera meaning that what you see&lt;br /&gt;
through the viewfinder is the actual image that will appear on the film. This&lt;br /&gt;
camera can shoot both 120 and 220 film. You will not be able to release the&lt;br /&gt;
shutter until there is film loaded    &lt;br /&gt;
==== Before Loading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Firstly, be sure that the wooden handle grip is screwed on&lt;br /&gt;
tight. All of the camera’s weight rests on this handle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Then you need to set&lt;br /&gt;
the film type you are working with, either 120 or 220. There are two places&lt;br /&gt;
that need to be adjusted for this. If you’re holding the camera like you would&lt;br /&gt;
to shoot, the first is on the right side of the camera. There is a dial that&lt;br /&gt;
lets your choose between the two. You will need a quarter or a strong finger&lt;br /&gt;
nail to move it. The second adjustment is found on the inside of the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
Open the camera by pulling down on the silver release on the bottom left side&lt;br /&gt;
of the camera. Notice the black speckled pressure plate on the door. Following&lt;br /&gt;
the direction of the arrows there, gently push the pressure plate down and to&lt;br /&gt;
the side that corresponds to your film type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Loading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
It is best to do this while sitting as these cameras do not com with neck straps. First, open the back of&lt;br /&gt;
the camera if it is not already open from the previous step. On the bottom of&lt;br /&gt;
the camera are two silver dials that hold the film spools in place. Fold out their handles and turn these&lt;br /&gt;
counter-clockwise and pull them up until the stay put.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure your empty take-up spool is on the right side. If there is&lt;br /&gt;
no spool in the camera, ask a Media Loan or Photoland staff to give you one.&lt;br /&gt;
(It is common medium format etiquette to leave your old spool in the camera&lt;br /&gt;
when you’re done using it as it is not needed for developing.) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like with 35mm film, the Pentax 6x7 needs to be loaded&lt;br /&gt;
in a “up and over” style and not “down and under.”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
            INSERT&lt;br /&gt;
EXAMPLE PHOTO&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After you’ve aligned the cross in the top of the film spool&lt;br /&gt;
with the notch in the camera, close the silver dials on the bottom of the&lt;br /&gt;
camera. Now pull the film across to the right side of the camera and thread the&lt;br /&gt;
film into the take-up spool just as you would with 35mm film. Use the crank lever to advance the film&lt;br /&gt;
and stop when the arrows on the film paper line up with the arrow on the inside&lt;br /&gt;
of the camera.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Close the back of the camera and advance the&lt;br /&gt;
film until “0” is line up with the red dot in the frame counter. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Exposing, Focusing, &amp;amp; Taking a Picture ====&lt;br /&gt;
The '''shutter speed''' is set by the dial on the top left side&lt;br /&gt;
of the camera. The current setting is indicated by whatever number is next to the&lt;br /&gt;
small red LED just to the right of the dial. Since there is no built in light&lt;br /&gt;
meter on this camera, there is no need to set the '''ISO''' for whatever film you are&lt;br /&gt;
using. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If using a flash, you must use a shutter speed on this&lt;br /&gt;
camera of 1/30&amp;lt;sup&amp;gt;th&amp;lt;/sup&amp;gt; of slower. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to do a timed exposure longer than one second&lt;br /&gt;
and you don’t want to keep you finger on the shutter as the “Bulb”&lt;br /&gt;
setting would allow, rotate the shutter speed dial to anywhere between the red “X” and “1000.”&lt;br /&gt;
Now, releasing the shutter will keep it open until you rotate the shutter speed&lt;br /&gt;
dial back to “X”. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The '''aperture''' ring is located on the lens. This is the ring&lt;br /&gt;
closest to the body of the camera and ranges from f/2.4 to f/22. The aperture&lt;br /&gt;
ring will be your primary tool for exposing. Also located on the lens is an&lt;br /&gt;
aperture preview mechanism. This allows you get see your depth of field before&lt;br /&gt;
actually taking a picture. You can lock this switch in &amp;quot;AUTO&amp;quot; mode so&lt;br /&gt;
that you will always be previewing your aperture. To do this, slide the switch&lt;br /&gt;
to &amp;quot;AUTO&amp;quot; and push down. To release it back to manual, push down on the other side of&lt;br /&gt;
the switch. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To focus, simply look through the viewfinder and adjust the&lt;br /&gt;
focus ring until the split viewfinder is even and the image looks crisp.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To release the shutter and take a picture, first crank the film advance level with your right thumb and smoothly and firmly depress the silver button next to the crank.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A cable release can be attached by screwing one into the shutter release button just as with Media Loan's 35mm Pentax K-1000 cameras.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Pentax 6x7 can not take multiple exposure pictures.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Unloading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once all of the frames are exposed you’ll want to unload&lt;br /&gt;
your film. When you’re ready to do this, wind the crank a few more times until&lt;br /&gt;
there is no more tension in the crank lever. By now the protective light-safe&lt;br /&gt;
paper should be covering the film and totally wrapped around the spool.&lt;br /&gt;
Unfasten the silver dials just like when loading film. Keeping a firm grip on the film so that it doesn't unroll,&lt;br /&gt;
lick or peel off the sticky tape on the roll and make sure it is securely attached to the&lt;br /&gt;
spool. Close everything back up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Using a Flash ====&lt;br /&gt;
To use a flash with the Pentax 6x7, first attach the flash to the hot shoe mount on the handle. This camera has options for both X-type sync cables and FP-type sync cables. Use only the X-type as plugging an X cable into an FP housing can cause damage. Again, this camera can only use a flash when the shutter speed is set to 1/30th of a second or slower.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Bronica-top2.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Bronica ETRS, ETRSI, &amp;amp; SQ-B ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are three different models of the Bronica available at Media Loan: SB-Q, ETRS, and ETRSi. They are very similar in operation except for a few minor things like button placement and the viewfinders and accessories that come with each camera. The aspect ratio that these cameras shoot at is also different. &lt;br /&gt;
* The ETRS and ETRSi have prism viewfinders and are in a 6x6 (square) format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The SB-Q (aka 645) has a wast-level view finder and is in a 6x4.5 (rectangle) format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Bronica begins to feel like a departure from the 35mm cameras. It is essentially a cube with a lens attached. One notices a very different feel when shooting with a Bronica than with the Pentax 6x7. Since a lot of the controls are not in conventional places, it may take some time to get acquainted with this camera. All of the Bronica cameras can only use 120 film. &lt;br /&gt;
==== Loading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Bronica-Loading.gif|right|222x222px]]&lt;br /&gt;
To load film, open the back of the camera by pinching the buttons that lie just under the viewfinder that are indicated by arrows. It is spring loaded and the film cartridge may fall out so be prepared. The outer shell will fold down and then the film cartridge can be removed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Bronica, film moves from top to bottom. This means your new roll of film will be on top and your empty spool on bottom Now that you're holding the film cartridge, notice there are two door flaps on the left side. Using your finger, push them open from the inside out. You will now be able to remove or insert film spools into each slot. Make sure the empty spool is on bottom and the fresh film is on top. Now you will take the film leader and run it over the pressure plate on the opposite side, bringing it down and around to the empty take up spool. A proper loading will have the black side of the paper leader facing outwards over the pressure plate.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now, using the manual film advance wheel located on the right side of the cartridge, advance the film until the arrow on the leader aligns with the red arrow on the inside left of the cartridge.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To close the camera, the cartridge must first be aligned properly on the camera body, not inserted into the door. Once the cartridge is in place, close the door. It can be a little tricky to get it perfectly aligned. Do not force anything. If the door won't shut, take the cartridge out and try again. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now wind the film advance lever until it stops moving and the frame counter is at 0. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Waist-level Viewfinder ====&lt;br /&gt;
Many of Media Loan's Bronicas, like the Mamiyas, feature waist-level viewfinders. This is different than a prism viewfinder in which the viewfinder is held up to the eye. Alternatively, waist-level viewfinders are held at the waist and have a &amp;quot;screen&amp;quot; and magnifier for focusing. Most waist-level viewfinders open by simply folding up the top of the camera. Sometimes there is a small latch. There are metal walls that will snap into place once it is open. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To open the magnifier for critical focusing, there is another release latch on the inside of the focusing hood. To close the magnifier, simply move it back into place with your finger, trying not to touch the actual glass.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some of the Bronicas come with prism viewfinders, which you can ask for. Some of the prism viewfinders are electronic and feature an internal light meter. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Exposing, Focusing, &amp;amp; Taking a Picture ====&lt;br /&gt;
To set the '''shutter speed''', there is a dial on the right side of the camera body. The Bronica has a range of shutter speeds from 1/500th of a second to 8 seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The '''aperture''' is set by twisting the aperture ring on the lens and has a range of f/2.4 to f/22.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are using a Bronica with a built in light meter, set the '''ISO''' to match your film speed by twisting the dial on the left of the viewfinder. If it does not have an internal light meter, you do not have to worry about setting your ISO. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To focus, open the magnifier in the focusing hood as described in the previous section. The Bronica's lens functions conveniently like most other camera lenses. Twist the focus ring until your subject comes into focus.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Before '''taking a picture''', the film must be advanced. Do this by winding the crank on the right side of the camera. When there is no film loaded in the camera, the crank will spin indefinitely. Once film has been loaded, the crank will stop itself in the correct position.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The shutter release button is a black button located on the front of the camera in the bottom left corner. You can attach a cable release by screwing one into the cable release hole on the left side of the camera. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is preferable to take a picture in the steps in order to ensure a focused picture:&lt;br /&gt;
# Advance the film&lt;br /&gt;
# Set your shutter speed and aperture according to your light meter&lt;br /&gt;
# Focus on your subject&lt;br /&gt;
# Depress the shutter release button&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Using a Flash ====&lt;br /&gt;
A flash can be connected using an X-type sync cable. The port for this flash is located on the front side of the camera in the top right corner. When plugging and unplugging a sync cable, always pull gently and straight out. Never use a twisting motion to get it out. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Bronica can conveniently sync with flash at any shutter speed, even at its fastest of 1/500th of a second.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Multiple Exposure ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Bronica cameras can take multiple exposures, exposing a single a single frame an unlimited number of times.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do this, first wind the crank to advance the film. There is a small lever next to the crank that needs to be rotated clockwise. A red warning indicator will appear in the viewfinder letting you know that the multiple exposure mode is engaged, however it is always wise to double check that this lever is in the left or counter-clockwise position (single exposure mode) prior to shooting. When the multiple exposure mode is set, the shutter can be cocked with the film advance crank an infinite number of times without actually advancing the film. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Mirror Lockup ====&lt;br /&gt;
The function of a camera's mirror lockup (also abbreviated MLU) is to reduce the potential for motion blur due to the movement of the mirror inside the camera. This movement will potentially effect photographs only when shooting at shutter speeds of 1/60th of a second or slower. Since the mirror that allows viewing and composing through the viewfinder before actually taking a picture is stuck in its upright position, you will no longer be able to use the viewfinder once the MLU function is engaged. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To engage this function on the Bronica, first advance the film with the crank. There is a lever located to the right of the multiple exposure lever. Move this lever counter-clockwise. You will know it is engaged when you can not see anything through the viewfinder. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are three settings for the mirror lockup function. &amp;quot;N&amp;quot; for normal in which the mirror will not lock up, and &amp;quot;S&amp;quot; for single frame and &amp;quot;C&amp;quot; for continuous in which the mirror will be locked up. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are on your last exposure of the roll and the mirror lock up function is still engaged, the shutter will continue to release every 360 degree turn and will not advance the film as would usually happen after the last exposure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Electronic Prism Viewfinder Operation ====&lt;br /&gt;
...&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mamiya-top.jpg|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mamiya C330 &amp;amp; C220 ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Mamiya cameras at Media Loan are perhaps the least intuitive to use of the medium format cameras. Learning to use one properly, however, is well worth it for both high quality images and mad style points. Like large format cameras, the Mamiya uses bellows to focus. Instead of adjusting the elements of glass within the lens, like with lenses that can focus internally, bellows physically move the lens farther or closer to the plane of film in order to focus.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Mamiya shoots square frames that are 2 1/4 inch long in each direction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Before Loading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Mamiya-Unlocking.gif|thumb]]&lt;br /&gt;
Like the Pentax 6x7, the Mamiya can shoot with either 120 or 220 film and the camera needs to be adjusted accordingly before loading film. First, adjust the orientation of the pressure plate on the inside of the camera to coincide with the kind of film you are using. To open the back of the camera rotate the silver locking disk at the top of the back side of the camera so that the red dot is pointing up and you can slide the disk in the direction of the arrow. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because the Mamiya uses a twin lens system rather than being an SLR, you will also need to adjust the parallax adjustment to match whatever the focal length of the lens is you are using. This can be set by the outer ring on the main dial on the left side of the camera. Depending on the adjustment made and the distance of the camera from the subject, a bar will appear on the left side of the viewfinder. ''This is important to notice as it indicates the top of the frame and everything above the bar will be cut off on the actual film, even though it is present in the viewfinder.''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additionally, because the farther the bellows take the lens away from the film, light is increasingly lost along the way from when it enters the lens to when it reaches the film. Inside the viewfinder, the number that the moving bar lands at indicates in number of stops how much to increase the exposure by in order to compensate for the reduced light. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Loading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
With the neck strap around your neck, open the back of the camera as indicated in the previous section. There are two spool release knobs on the left side of the camera. These pull out and will allow you to remove the film spools. Twist these knobs while pulling to lock them in their disengaged position. On the Mamiya, the film moves from bottom to top, opposite of the Bronica cameras move film. Accordingly, place the empty take up spool in the top compartment. Lock it in place. Then place your fresh roll of film in the bottom compartment and lock it in place.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pull out the film leader from the fresh spool and bring it up to the empty spool and thread it into that spool. Once threaded, turn the film advance crank on the right side of the camera clockwise to advance the film leader until the printed arrow on the leader matches up with the start mark on the inside of the camera (located a little lower than half way down on the right side.) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Close the back of the camera by pushing firmly on either side of the silver locking dial. Once closed, turn the locking dial counter-clockwise to lock the back cover in place. Continue to turn the film advance crank clockwise until it won't turn anymore. Your shutter is now cocked and ready to take a picture. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Exposing, Focusing, &amp;amp; Taking a Picture ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Mamiya is slightly different than other cameras in that both the aperture and shutter speed are set on the bottom lens. There are individual rings for each of these settings. The '''aperture''' can be set by moving the little black handle on the left side of the lens and the '''shutter speed''' can be set by twisting the knob with fractions of a second on it. Do not change the shutter speed after the shutter has been cocked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The aperture ranges from f/2.8 to f/22 and the shutter speed ranges from 1/500th of a second to 1 seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since the Mamiya does not have an internal light meter there is no need for an '''ISO''' setting. The camera does however allow you to set the ISO of the film you are using on the dial configuration on the right side of the camera. This does not effect the performance of the camera at all but simply serves as a reminder for the kind of film you are shooting. Be sure to also check out a light meter from Media Loan when checking out a medium format camera.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like the Bronica, most of Media Loan's Mamiyas feature waist-level viewfinders although some of them come with prism viewfinders. You can request either when checking one out. Also like the Bronica, the Mamiya has a magnifier seated within the focusing hood that can be expanded for critical focusing. To '''focus''' the camera, the Mamiya uses bellows that bring the lens closer or farther from the film plane. The lens is a fixed piece of glass and does not focus internally. To adjust the bellows and focus your image, twist either of the large black knobs on the bottom front of the camera. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After your film has been advanced by turning the crank clockwise, the camera is ready to '''take a picture'''. There are two ways to release the shutter. The first is a silver button on the front of the camera in the bottom left corner. A cable release can also be screwed in here. The second way is with the slide mechanism on the right side of the camera. There is a small black lever for your thumb. Slide this downward to release the shutter. As the Mamiyas are quite old, not all of the cameras are able to be fired with either method. Some can only use one or the other and this will be indicated by a note on the camera. Advance the film after each exposure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a shutter lock on the slide mechanism that can be pushed to the &amp;quot;L&amp;quot; position. This prevents both shutter releases from being able to move and is thus useful to use when transporting the camera or arranging your shot. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To take take a picture using '''multiple exposures''', there is a dial next to the film advance crank that has the option of either &amp;quot;SINGLE&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;MULTI&amp;quot;. Turn this to &amp;quot;MULTI&amp;quot; to be able to exposure a frame multiple times without needing to advance the film. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Unloading Film ====&lt;br /&gt;
After twelve frames are exposed, continue to turn the winding crank until there is no more tension on the advance crank. At this point, the protective paper of the film should be rolled up around the take up spool. When unloading the film, keep the spool rolled and hold the film tightly to prevent light exposure. Lick or peel the tab on the film and wrap it firmly around the exposed film. Close the camera back.&lt;br /&gt;
==== Using a Flash ====&lt;br /&gt;
To synchronize a flash with the Mamiya, switch the Synchro Selector MX Switch to “X”.  You will need to check out a Vivitar flash and a flash sync cable.  Because the Vivitar flash was not designed to be used with the Mamiya, it will not properly mount on the hot shoe. Therefore, you’ll need to hold it while taking your picture. The Seagull and the Kalimar should not require a sync cable as they can mount onto the hot shoe.&lt;br /&gt;
Caution: Avoid moving the self-timer while the flash sync is set at “M”.  It may cause damage to the self-timer. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[category:Media Loan]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Linkee14</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Pentax-top.jpg&amp;diff=36323</id>
		<title>File:Pentax-top.jpg</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://helpwiki.evergreen.edu/wiki/index.php?title=File:Pentax-top.jpg&amp;diff=36323"/>
				<updated>2018-01-05T04:29:30Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Linkee14: Linkee14 uploaded a new version of File:Pentax-top.jpg&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Linkee14</name></author>	</entry>

	</feed>